Manual Honda Fit PDF

Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Honda Fit was a wise investment. It As you read this manual, you will find
will give you years of driving pleasure. information that is preceded by a
symbol. This information is
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read
intended to help you avoid damage to
this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
your vehicle, other property, or the
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your vehicle so
environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer's staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
2009 Fit i
Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of
any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It
may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never
linked to the vehicle owner.
ii 2009 Fit
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
is very important. And operating this ● Safety Labels － on the vehicle.
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. ● Safety Messages － preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don't follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
Of course, it is not practical or HURT if you don't follow instructions.
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
maintaining your vehicle. You must instructions.
use your own good judgement.
● Safety Headings － such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section － such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
● Instructions － how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information － please read it
carefully.
2009 Fit iii

2009 Fit Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, steering wheel, and other convenience items) ............. 57
Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control) ................................. 109
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ...................................................................... 197
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 213
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 243
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) .............................. 283
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 315
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 331
Index ........................................................................................................................................................................ I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
00X31-TK6-6003 1
Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer Relations

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- (U.S. and Canada only)
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load A summary of the warranties
Your Vehicle at a Glance luggage and other cargo. covering your new vehicle, and how
A quick reference to the main Driving to contact us for any reason. Refer to
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, your warranty manual for detailed
shift the transmission, and park. information.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the Maintenance Index
proper use and care of your vehicle's The maintenance minder shows you Service Information Summary
seat belts, an overview of the when you need to take your vehicle A summary of the information you
supplemental restraint system, and to the dealer for maintenance need when you pull up to the fuel
valuable information on how to service. There is also a list of things pump.
protect children with child restraints. to check and instructions on how to
Instruments and Controls check them.
Explains the purpose of each Taking Care of the Unexpected
instrument panel indicator and This section covers several problems
gauge, and how to use the controls motorists sometimes experience, and
on the dashboard and steering details how to handle them.
column.
Technical Information
Features ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
How to operate the heating and air and technical information.
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
2 2009 Fit
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG INSTRUMENT PANEL AUDIO SYSTEM

(P. 9, 25) INDICATOR (P. 60) (P. 115, 143)
GAUGES (P. 68) NAVIGATION SYSTEMꭧ

MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 101) PASSENGER'S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 9, 25)
DOOR LOCK TAB
(P. 81)
USB ADAPTER CABLEꭧ
POWER DOOR LOCK (P. 130, 137, 171, 178)
MASTER SWITCHꭧ
(P. 81)
HEATING/COOLING
POWER WINDOW CONTROLSꭧ
SWITCHES (P. 110)
(P. 100)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 200)
PARKING BRAKE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P. 219)

(P. 102) MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P. 217)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
ꭧ: If equipped
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 3
Main Menu
PADDLE SHIFTER HORNꭧ1 INSTRUMENT PANEL PADDLE SHIFTER WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

(DOWNSHIFT)ꭧ2 BRIGHTNESS (P. 76) (UPSHIFT)ꭧ2 (P. 73)
(P. 224) (P. 224)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNAL/ HAZARD WARNING
FOG LIGHTSꭧ2 BUTTON
(P. 74) (P. 76)
REMOTE AUDIO PASSENGER
CONTROL AIRBAG OFF
BUTTONSꭧ2 INDICATOR
(P. 189) (P. 31)
NAVIGATION REAR WINDOW
SYSTEM VOICE DEFOGGER/
CONTROL HEATED MIRROR
BUTTONSꭧ3 BUTTONꭧ2
(P. 76/102)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
VEHICLE STABILITY (P. 190)
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
SWITCHꭧ2 (P. 106)
(P. 234)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONSꭧ2
(P. 77) (P. 194)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
ꭧ2: If equipped.
ꭧ3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4 2009 Fit
Main Menu
This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ..................... 19 If You Must Drive with Several
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Children ................................ 37
yourself and your passengers. It Tensioners ............................ 20 If a Child Requires Close
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belt Maintenance ............... 20 Attention ............................... 37
Additional Safety Precautions ..... 38

explains how your airbags work. And Additional Information About Your
it tells you how to properly restrain Airbags .................................. 22 Protecting Infants and Small
infants and children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components ....... 22 Children ................................ 39
How Your Front Airbags Work ... 25 Protecting Infants ...................... 39
Important Safety Precautions ........... 6 How Your Side Airbags Work .... 28 Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Your Vehicle's Safety Features ......... 7 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat .................... 41
Seat Belts .................................... 8 Work ..................................... 30 Installing a Child Seat .................... 42
Airbags ........................................ 9 How the SRS Indicator Works .... 30 Installing a Child Seat with
Protecting Adults and Teens .......... 11 How the Side Airbag Off LATCH .................................. 43
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 Indicator Works ..................... 31 Installing a Child Seat with a
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11 How the Passenger Airbag Off Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 45
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12 Indicator Works ..................... 31 Installing a Child Seat with a
4. Adjust the Head Restraints ..... 13 Airbag Service ........................... 32 Tether ................................... 47
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Additional Safety Precautions ..... 33 Protecting Larger Children ............ 49
Belts .................................. 14 Protecting Children － General Checking Seat Belt Fit ............... 49
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines ............................. 34 Using a Booster Seat .................. 50
Position ............................. 15 All Children Must Be When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Advice for Pregnant Women ...... 16 Restrained ............................. 34 Front ..................................... 51
Additional Safety Precautions ..... 17 All Children Should Sit in a Back Additional Safety Precautions ..... 52
Additional Information About Your Seat ....................................... 35 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 53
Seat Belts ............................... 18 The Passenger's Front Airbag Safety Labels ................................. 54
Seat Belt System Components .... 18 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 35
2009 Fit 5
Main Menu Table Of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You'll find many safety Restrain All Children Don't Drink and Drive
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back one drink can reduce your ability to
The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and respond to changing conditions, and
are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained your reaction time gets worse with
most important. in a child seat. Larger children every additional drink. So don't drink
should use a booster seat and a lap/ and drive, and don't let your friends
Always Wear Your Seat Belt drink and drive, either.
A seat belt is your best protection in shoulder belt until they can use the
all types of collisions. Airbags are belt properly without a booster seat Control Your Speed
designed to supplement seat belts, (see pages 34 － 52). Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards the higher the speed, the greater the
your vehicle is equipped with While airbags can save lives, they risk, but serious injuries can also occur
airbags, make sure you and your can cause serious or fatal injuries to at lower speeds. Never drive faster
passengers always wear your seat occupants who sit too close to them, than is safe for current conditions,
belts, and wear them properly (see or are not properly restrained. regardless of the maximum speed
page 14). Infants, young children, and short posted.
adults are at the greatest risk. Be Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition
sure to follow all instructions and Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
warnings in this manual. failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such
problems, check your tire pressures
and condition frequently, and perform
all regularly scheduled maintenance
(see page 245).
6 2009 Fit
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(3) (4) (9) features that work together to protect
you and your passengers during a
(1) crash.
(11)

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
(7) safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
(5) and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
(2) can't take full advantage of these
(6) features unless you remain sitting in
(10) a proper position and always wear
(8) (1) Safety Cage
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs features can contribute to injuries if
(4) Head Restraints they are not used properly.
(2) (5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts The following pages explain how you
(7) Front Airbags can take an active role in protecting
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags yourself and your passengers.
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
2009 Fit 7
Seat Belts ● Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even ● Keep you from being thrown out of
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your airbags. ● Help keep you in a good position
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts Be sure you and your good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most passengers always wear seat injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and belts and wear them properly. allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained When properly worn, seat belts:
in child seats.) Of course, seat belts cannot
● Keep you connected to the vehicle completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly so you can take advantage of the crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious vehicle's built-in safety features. can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. ● Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including: What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all － frontal impacts Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces require you to － side impacts make sure you wear it properly.
wear seat belts. － rear impacts
－ rollovers
8 2009 Fit
Airbags

Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
Your vehicle has a supplemental
driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
restraint system (SRS) with front
during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
airbags to help protect the heads and
impact (see page 28 for more seating positions during a moderate
chests of the driver and a front seat
information on how your side airbags to severe side or front impact (see
passenger during a moderate to
work). page 30 for more information on how
severe frontal collision (see page 25
your side curtain airbags work).
for more information on how your
front airbags work).
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 9
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
● Airbags do not replace seat belts.
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
They are designed to supplement steering wheel as possible while
Remember, however, that no safety
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
the seat belts. system can prevent all injuries or
front passenger should move their
deaths that can occur in a severe
●
Airbags offer no protection in rear seat as far back from the dashboard
impacts, or minor frontal or side crash, even when seat belts are
as possible.
collisions. properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
● Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10 2009 Fit
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Your vehicle has a door and 2. Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide tailgate open indicator on
instructions on how to properly the instrument panel to indicate
protect the driver, adult passengers, when any door or the tailgate is not
and teenage children who are large tightly closed.

enough and mature enough to drive Locking the doors reduces the
or ride in the front. chance of someone being thrown out
See pages 34 － 38 for important of the vehicle during a crash, and it
guidelines on how to properly protect helps prevent passengers from
infants, small children, and larger accidentally opening a door and
children who ride in your vehicle. falling out.
1. Close and Lock the Doors Locking the doors and the tailgate
After everyone has entered the also helps prevent an outsider from
vehicle, be sure the doors and the unexpectedly opening a door or the Adjust the driver's seat as far to the
tailgate are closed and locked. tailgate when you come to a stop. rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
See page 81 for how to lock the Have a front passenger adjust their
doors, and page 62 for how the door seat as far to the rear as possible.
and tailgate open indicator works.
Some models have the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page 83.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 11
If you sit too close to the steering 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure it
steering wheel up and down, and in is locked in position.
and out (see page 77). See page 93 for how to adjust the Adjust the driver's seat-back to a
If you cannot get far enough away front seats. comfortable, upright position, leaving
from the steering wheel and still ample space between your chest and
reach the controls, we recommend the airbag cover in the center of the
that you investigate whether some steering wheel.
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
12 2009 Fit
4. Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

rear center seating position, make
Reclining the seat-back too far sure the center head restraint is
can result in serious injury or properly positioned.
death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Improperly positioning head
back in the seat. restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
Reclining a seat-back so that the seriously injured in a crash.
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant's chest Make sure head restraints are
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver's head restraint so in place and positioned properly
the belt. It also increases the chance the center of the back of your head before driving.
of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the
and being seriously injured. The restraint. Properly adjusted head restraints will
farther a seat-back is reclined, the help protect occupants from whiplash
greater the risk of injury. Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller and other crash injuries.
See page 93 for how to adjust the persons should adjust their restraint See page 94 for how to adjust the
seat-backs. as high as possible. head restraints and how the driver's
and front passenger's active head
restraints work.
2009 Fit 13
5. Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, Improperly positioning the seat
then tug on the belt to make sure the belts can cause serious injury
belt is securely latched. Check that or death in a crash.
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Make sure all seat belts are
injuries in a crash. properly positioned before
driving.
The seat belt in the center position of
the back seat can be unlatched and
retracted to allow the back seat to be If the seat belt touches or crosses
folded up or down. This seat belt your neck, or if it crosses your arm
Position the lap part of the belt as low as instead of your shoulder, you need to
should be latched whenever the seat- possible across your hips, then pull up
back is in an upright position. See adjust the seat belt anchor height.
on the shoulder part of the belt so the
page 99 for how to unlatch and lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong
relatch the seat belt. pelvic bones take the force of a crash
and reduces the chance of internal
injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper body.
14 2009 Fit
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting

lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very

If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the important that they continue to sit
occupant in a crash. upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
No one should sit in a seat with an vehicle is parked and the engine is
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat off.
belt that is not working properly can
RELEASE BUTTONS result in serious injury or death. Sitting improperly can increase the
Have your dealer check the belt as chance of injury during a crash. For
The front seats have adjustable seat example, if an occupant slouches, lies
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible.
down, turns sideways, sits forward,
an anchor, squeeze the two release See page 18 for additional leans forward or sideways, or puts
buttons, and slide the anchor up or information about your seat belts and one or both feet up, the chance of
down as needed (it has four how to take care of them. injury during a crash is greatly
positions). increased.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 15
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding
vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries to
both you and your unborn child that
can be caused by a crash or an
Sitting improperly or out of inflating front airbag.
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash. Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it's okay for you to
Always sit upright, well back in drive.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
the seat, with your feet on the protect yourself and your unborn
floor. child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
16 2009 Fit
Additional Safety Precautions ● Two people should never use the ● Keep your hands and arms away
● Never let passengers ride in the same seat belt. If they do, they from the airbag covers. If your
cargo area or on top of a folded- could be very seriously injured in a hands or arms are close to an
down back seat. If they do, they crash. airbag cover, they could be injured
could be very seriously injured in a if the airbag inflates.

crash.
● Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve ● Do not attach or place objects on
● Never let passengers ride in the occupant comfort or reposition the the front airbag covers. Objects on
area in front of a folded-up rear shoulder part of a seat belt can the covers marked ‘‘ SRS
seat or on top of a folded-down rear reduce the protective capability of AIRBAG ’’ could interfere with the
seat. If they do, they could be very the belt and increase the chance of proper operation of the airbags or
seriously injured in a crash. serious injury in a crash. be propelled inside the vehicle and
● Passengers should not stand up or hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
● Do not place hard or sharp objects
change seats while the vehicle is between yourself and a front ● Do not attach hard objects on or
moving. A passenger who is not airbag. Carrying hard or sharp near a door. If a side airbag or a
wearing a seat belt during a crash objects on your lap, or driving with side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
or emergency stop can be thrown a pipe or other sharp object in your holder or other hard object
against the inside of the vehicle, mouth, can result in injuries if your attached on or near the door could
against other occupants, or out of front airbag inflates. be propelled inside the vehicle and
the vehicle. hurt someone.
2009 Fit 17
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If a front passenger does not fasten If the indicator comes on or the
Your seat belt system includes lap/ their seat belt, the indicator will beeper sounds when the driver's seat
shoulder belts in all seating positions. come on about 6 seconds after the belt is latched and there is no front
The front seat belts are also equipped ignition switch is turned to the ON seat passenger and no items on the
with automatic seat belt tensioners. (II) position. front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
This system uses the same sensors as If either the driver or a front
system. Look for and remove:
the front airbags to monitor whether passenger does not fasten their seat
the front seat belts are latched or belt while driving, the beeper will ●
Any items under the front
unlatched, and how much weight is on sound and the indicator will flash passenger's seat.
the front passenger's seat (see page again at regular intervals.
27 ).
● Any object(s) hanging on the seat
When no one is sitting in the front or in the seat-back pocket.
The seat belt system includes passenger's seat, or a child or small
an indicator on the instrument
● Any object(s) touching the rear of
adult is riding there, the indicator
panel and a beeper to remind you and the seat-back.
should not come on and the beeper
your passengers to fasten your seat should not sound. If no obstructions are found, have
belts. your vehicle checked by a dealer.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position before your seat
belt is fastened, the beeper will sound
and the indicator will flash. If your seat
belt is not fastened before the beeper
stops, the indicator will stop flashing
but remain on.
18 2009 Fit
Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency

The lap/shoulder belt goes over your locking retractor. In normal driving,
shoulder, across your chest, and the retractor lets you move freely in
across your hips. your seat while it keeps some tension
on the belt. During a collision or

To fasten the belt, insert the latch
sudden stop, the retractor
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is
restrain your body.
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
the driver's have a lockable retractor DETACHABLE
To unlock the belt, press the red
that must be activated to secure a ANCHOR
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
child seat (see page 45).
the belt across your body so that it The lap/shoulder belt in the center
retracts completely. After exiting the If the shoulder part of the belt is seating position on the rear seat is
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the pulled all the way out, the lockable equipped with a detachable seat belt
way and will not get closed in the retractor will activate. The belt will that has two parts: a small latch plate
door. retract, but it will not allow the and an anchor buckle.
passenger to move freely.
The detachable seat belt should
To deactivate the lockable retractor, normally be latched whenever the
unlatch the buckle and let the seat seat-backs are in an upright position.
belt fully retract. To refasten the seat For more information about the
belt, pull it out only as far as needed. detachable seat belt, see page 99.
2009 Fit 19
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance
activate in any collision severe For safety, you should check the
enough to cause the front airbags to condition of your seat belts regularly.
deploy.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
If a side curtain airbag deploys frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
during a side impact, the tensioner that the latches work smoothly and
on that side of the vehicle will also the belts retract easily. If a belt does
deploy. not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
The tensioners can also be activated
267). Any belt that is not in good
during a collision in which the front
condition or working properly will
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
not provide good protection and
airbags would not be needed, but the
should be replaced as soon as
additional restraint could be helpful.
For added protection, the front seat possible.
belts are equipped with automatic When the tensioners are activated,
Honda provides a limited warranty
seat belt tensioners. When activated, the seat belts will remain tight until
on seat belts. See your Honda
the tensioners immediately tighten they are unbuckled. Warranty Information booklet for
the belts to help hold the driver and a details.
front passenger in position.
20 2009 Fit
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious
of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts

do not work properly when
The dealer should also inspect the needed.
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
2009 Fit 21
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(8) (9)
(10)
(2) (11)
(5)
(12)
(1)
(3)
(1) Driver's Front Airbag
(2) Passenger's Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (6)
(5) Side Airbags (4)
(6) Driver's Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (7)
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(11) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator (4) (5)
22 2009 Fit
Your airbag system includes:

(13) ● Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver's
airbag is stored in the center of the

steering wheel; the front
passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 25).
● Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28).
(14) ● Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
(15) (15) and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page 30).
(14)
(13) Side Curtain Airbags
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 23
● Automatic front seat belt ● Weight sensors that monitor the ● An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 20). weight on the front passenger's panel that alerts you that the
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs passenger's side airbag has been
● Sensors that can detect a moderate
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an turned off (see page 31).
to severe front impact or side
infant or small child), the
impact. ● An indicator on the dashboard that
passenger's front airbag will be
alerts you that the passenger's
● Sensors that can detect whether a turned off (see page 27).
front airbag has been turned off
child is in the passenger's side ● A sophisticated electronic system (see page 31).
airbag path and signal the control
that continually monitors and
unit to turn the airbag off (see ● Emergency backup power in case
records information about the
page 29). your vehicle's electrical system is
sensors, the control unit, the
disconnected in a crash.
● Sensors that can detect whether airbag activators, the seat belt
the driver's seat belt and the front tensioners, and driver and front
passenger's seat belt are latched or passenger seat belt use when the
unlatched (see page 18). ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
● A driver's seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat ● An indicator on the instrument
from the front airbag. If the seat is panel that alerts you to a possible
too far forward, the airbag will problem with your airbags,
inflate with less force (see page sensors, or seat belt tensioners
27). (see page 30).
24 2009 Fit
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In After inflating, the front airbags
such cases, the seat belt will provide immediately deflate, so they won't
If you ever have a moderate to severe sufficient protection, and the interfere with the driver's visibility,
frontal collision, sensors will detect supplemental protection offered by or the ability to steer or operate other
the vehicle's rapid deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver's airbag can deploy if The total time for inflation and
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
inflate the driver's and front seat, or if the advanced airbag fast that most occupants are not
passenger's airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger's aware that the airbags deployed until
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 27). they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 25
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag's surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of wearing a seat belt or not.
In a more severe crash, both stages
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant's belt is not latched,
so. the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
In a less severe crash, one stage will
occupant would need extra
ignite first, then the second stage will
protection.
ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant's belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
26 2009 Fit
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and

children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work DRIVER'S
SEAT
properly: POSITION PASSENGER'S
● Occupants must sit upright and SENSOR SEAT WEIGHT
wear their seat belts properly. SENSORS
● Do not spill any liquids on or

under the seats, cover the sensors, The driver's advanced front airbag The passenger's advanced front
or put any objects or metal items system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
under the front seats. sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda does
too far forward, the airbag will inflate not encourage carrying an infant or
●
Back-seat passengers should not with less force, regardless of the small child in front, if the sensors
put their feet under the front seats. severity of the impact. detect the weight of an infant or
Failure to follow these instructions small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
If there is a problem with the sensor,
could damage the sensors or prevent kg), the system will automatically
the SRS indicator will come on, and
them from working properly. turn the passenger's front airbag off.
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver's Be aware that objects placed on the
seating position. passenger's seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 27
When the airbag is turned off, a ● Moving the front seat forcibly back How Your Side Airbags Work
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in against cargo on the seat or floor
the center of the dashboard comes behind it.
on (see page 31). ● Hanging heavy items on the front
If the weight sensors detect there is passenger seat, or placing heavy
no passenger in the front seat, the items in the seat-back pocket.
airbag will be off. However, the ● Moving the front seat or seat-back
passenger airbag off indicator will
forcibly back against the folded
not come on.
rear seat.
To ensure that the passenger's
If your vehicle has optional floor
advanced front airbag system will
mats, make sure the mat behind the
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the driver's seat is hooked to the floor
weight on the front passenger's seat. mat anchor (see page 267). If it is If you ever have a moderate to severe
This includes: not, the mat may interfere with the side impact, sensors will detect rapid
proper operation of the sensors and acceleration and signal the control
● A rear passenger pushing or operation of the seat. unit to instantly inflate either the
pulling on the back of the front driver's or the passenger's side
passenger's seat. airbag.
28 2009 Fit
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 31), have the passenger
passenger's side, the passenger's system designed primarily to protect sit upright. Once the passenger is
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger's out of the airbag's deployment path,
is no passenger. seat. the system will turn the airbag back

Although Honda does not encourage on, and the indicator will go out.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the There will be some delay between
should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has the moment the passenger moves
upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbag's into or out of the airbag deployment
deployment path, the airbag will shut path and when the indicator comes
off. on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a A front seat passenger should not
short adult leans sideways, or a use a cushion or other object as a
larger adult slouches and leans backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
sideways into the airbag's system from working properly.
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
2009 Fit 29
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger's How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger's side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt
One or both side curtain airbags may tensioners.
inflate in a moderate to severe frontal When you turn the ignition switch to
collision which causes the front the ON (II) position, this indicator
airbags to deploy. comes on briefly then goes off. This
To get the best protection from the tells you the system is working
side curtain airbags, occupants properly.
should wear their seat belts and sit If the indicator comes on at any other
upright and well back in their seats. time, or does not come on at all, you
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG should have the system checked by
In a moderate to severe side impact, your dealer. For example:
sensors will detect rapid acceleration ● If the SRS indicator does not come
and signal the control unit to on after you turn the ignition
instantly inflate the side curtain switch to the ON (II) position.
airbag and activate the seat belt ● If the indicator stays on after the
tensioner on the driver's or the
engine starts.
passenger's side of the vehicle.
● If the indicator comes on or flashes
on and off while you drive.
30 2009 Fit
If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off Indicator How the Passenger Airbag Off
the airbags and seat belt tensioners Works Indicator Works
may not work properly when you U.S. Canada
need them. U.S.
This indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG

alerts you that the OFF INDICATOR
passenger's side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
Ignoring the SRS indicator can mean there is a problem with your
result in serious injury or death side airbags.
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work When you turn the ignition switch to
properly. the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
Have your vehicle checked by a off (see page 61). If it doesn't come On vehicle with navigation system
dealer as soon as possible if on, stays on, or comes on while This indicator alerts you that the
the SRS indicator alerts you to driving without a passenger in the passenger's front airbag has been
a possible problem. front seat, have the system checked. shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger's seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 31
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR If an adult or teenage passenger is Airbag Service

U.S. Canada riding in front, move the seat as far to Your airbag systems are virtually
the rear as possible, and have the maintenance free, and there are no
passenger sit upright and wear the parts you can safely service.
seat belt properly. However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects ●
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
on the seat, or with an adult riding that has deployed must be
there, something may be interfering replaced along with the control
with the weight sensors. Look for unit and other related parts. Any
On vehicle without navigation system and remove: seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Be aware that objects placed on the ● Any items under the front
front seat can cause the indicator to passenger's seat. Do not try to remove or replace
come on. any airbag by yourself. This must
● Any object hanging on the seat or
be done by an authorized dealer or
If the weight sensors detect there is in the seat-back pocket.
a knowledgeable body shop.
no passenger in the front seat, the ● Any object(s), such as a folded-
airbag will be off. However, the ● The SRS indicator alerts you to a
down back seat, that are touching problem. Take your vehicle to an
passenger airbag off indicator will the rear of the seat-back.
not come on. authorized dealer as soon as
If no obstructions are found, have possible. If you ignore this
The passenger airbag off indicator your vehicle checked by a dealer as indication, your airbags may not
may come on and off repeatedly if the soon as possible. operate properly.
total weight on the seat is near the
airbag cutoff threshold.
32 2009 Fit
● If your vehicle has a moderate to Additional Safety Precautions ● Do not cover or replace front seat-
severe impact. Even if your airbags ● Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
do not inflate, your dealer should airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
inspect the driver's seat position seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers
sensor, the front passenger's protection. can prevent your side airbags from

weight sensors, the front seat belt inflating during a side impact.
● Do not tamper with airbag
tensioners, and all seat belts worn components or wiring for any ● Do not remove or modify a front
during a crash to make sure they reason. Tampering could cause seat without consulting your
are operating properly. the airbags to deploy, possibly dealer. This could make the
causing very serious injury. driver's seat position sensor or the
front passenger's weight sensors
● Do not expose the front ineffective. If it is necessary to
passenger's seat-back to liquid. If remove or modify a front seat to
water or another liquid soaks into accommodate a person with
a seat-back, it can prevent the side disabilities, first contact Honda
airbag cutoff system from working Automobile Customer Service at
properly. (800) 999-1009.
2009 Fit 33
Protecting Children － General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children aged 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the vehicle them properly (see pages 49 － 52).
If you have children, or ever need to (see pages 39 － 48).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
34 2009 Fit
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger's Front Airbag Can Small Children
Seat Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger's front airbag can be
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too

back seat. the passenger's front airbag is quite far forward, or the child's head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety inflating front airbag can strike the
force to cause very serious injuries.
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that
restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passenger's Larger Children
states have laws restricting where front airbag off (see page 31), please Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
children may ride. follow these guidelines: or killed by an inflating passenger's
Children who ride in back are less Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
likely to be injured by striking Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, with a passenger's front airbag. If the be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an airbag inflates, it can hit the back of belt (see page 49 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride the child seat with enough force to information about protecting larger
in the back. kill or very seriously injure an infant. children).
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 35
To remind you of the passenger's U.S. Models

front airbag hazards, and that DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
36 2009 Fit
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in a back
If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a

children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child than the front.
front: attention.
●
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 49). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
● Move the vehicle seat as far to the
driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 93).
● Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15).
● Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
14).
2009 Fit 37
Additional Safety Precautions ● Make sure any unused seat belt For example, infants and small
● Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, children left in a vehicle on a hot
your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, day can die from heatstroke. A
seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and child left alone with the key in the
thrown forward and crush the locked. If a child wraps a loose ignition switch can accidentally set
child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they the vehicle in motion, possibly
seat-back. If you are wearing a seat can be seriously or fatally injured. injuring themselves or others.
belt, the child can be torn from (See pages 45 and 46 for how to
activate and deactivate the ● Lock all doors and the tailgate
your arms and be seriously hurt or when your vehicle is not in use.
killed. lockable retractor.)
Children who play in vehicles can
● Never put a seat belt over yourself ●
Use the childproof door locks to accidentally get trapped inside.
and a child. During a crash, the prevent children from opening the Teach your children not to play in
belt could press deep into the child rear doors. This can prevent or around vehicles.
and cause serious or fatal injuries. children from accidentally falling
out (see page 82). ● Keep vehicle keys/remote
● Never let two children use the transmitters out of the reach of
same seat belt. If they do, they
● Do not leave children alone in a children. Even very young
could be very seriously injured in a vehicle. Leaving children without children learn how to unlock
crash. adult supervision is illegal in most vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
states and Canadian provinces, and switch, and open the tailgate,
can be very hazardous. which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
38 2009 Fit
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed If the passenger's front airbag
facing forward, an infant could be inflates, it can hit the back of the
very seriously injured during a child seat with enough force to kill or
frontal collision. seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
Child Seat Type recommended, or from locking their
An infant must be properly restrained seat-back in the desired position.
in a rear-facing, reclining child seat
until the child reaches the seat It could also interfere with proper
maker's weight or height limit for the operation of the passenger's
seat, and the child is at least one year advanced front airbag system.
old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby's head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 39
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child
the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit for
front passenger's seat, move the seat the seat.
as far forward as needed, and leave it Child Seat Placement
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get We strongly recommend placing a
a smaller rear-facing child seat. forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
Placing a rear-facing child seat the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger's airbag can be
in the front seat can result in
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
serious injury or death during a
collision. far forward, or the child's head is
Child Seat Type thrown forward during a collision, an
A child who is at least one year old, inflating airbag can strike the child
Always place a rear-facing child and who fits within the child seat
seat in the back seat, not the with enough force to cause very
maker's weight and height limits, serious or fatal injuries.
front. should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
40 2009 Fit
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Even with advanced front airbags Selecting a Child Seat Whatever type of seat you choose, to
that automatically turn the When buying a child seat, you need provide proper protection, a child
passenger's front airbag off (see page to choose either a conventional child seat should meet three
31), a back seat is the safest place for seat, or one designed for use with requirements:
a small child. the lower anchors and tethers for

1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
children (LATCH) system. Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move Conventional child seats must be Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
possible, and be sure the child seat is whereas LATCH-compatible seats 2. The child seat should be of the
firmly secured to the vehicle and the are secured by attaching the seat to proper type and size to fit the child.
child is properly strapped in the seat. hardware built into the two outer Rear-facing for infants, forward-
seating positions in the back seat. facing for small children.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats 3. The child seat should fit the vehicle
are easier to install and reduce the seating position (or positions)
Placing a forward-facing child possibility of improper installation, where it will be used.
seat in the front seat can result we recommend selecting this style.
in serious injury or death if the Before purchasing a conventional
front airbag inflates. In seating positions and vehicles not child seat, or using a previously
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- purchased one, we recommend that
If you must place a forward- compatible child seat can be installed you test the seat in the specific
facing child seat in front, move using a seat belt. vehicle seating position or positions
the vehicle seat as far back as where the seat will be used.
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
2009 Fit 41
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat A child seat secured with a seat 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
and a good place to install the seat, belt should be installed as firmly Make sure the child is properly
there are three main steps in as possible. However, it does not strapped in the child seat
installing the seat: need to be ‘‘ rock solid. ’’ Some according to the child seat maker's
side-to-side movement can be instructions. A child who is not
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be expected and should not reduce properly secured in a child seat
secured to the vehicle with the lap the child seat's effectiveness. can be seriously injured in a crash.
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with If the child seat is not secure, try The following pages provide
the LATCH (lower anchors and installing it in a different seating guidelines on how to properly install
tethers for children) system. A position, or use a different style of a child seat. A forward-facing child
child whose seat is not properly child seat that can be firmly seat is used in all examples, but the
secured to the vehicle can be secured. instructions are the same for rear-
endangered in a crash. facing child seats.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
42 2009 Fit
Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH. Rigid type
The location of each lower anchor is LOWER ANCHORS
indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
anchor point. seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
You can find lower anchors in the 1. Move the seat belt buckle or lower anchors according to the
slits in the seat-backs. tongue away from the lower child seat maker's instructions.
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
2. Make sure there are no objects have a rigid-type connector as
near the anchors that could shown above.
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 43
ANCHOR
Flexible type
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page 6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
have a flexible-type connector as 94), then route the tether strap anchor, then tighten the strap as
shown above. through the legs of the head instructed by the child seat maker.
restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow the 7. Push and pull the child seat
making sure the strap is not
child seat maker's instructions for forward and from side-to-side to
twisted.
adjusting or tightening the fit. verify that it is secure.
44 2009 Fit
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/

shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver's have a lockable retractor that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
the center seating position of the rear seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
seat, make sure to push down the through the child seat according to belt all the way out until it stops,
head restraint to the lowest position, the seat maker's instructions, then then let the belt feed back into the
and make sure the detachable seat insert the latch plate into the retractor.
belt is securely latched (see page buckle.
99). 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 45
To deactivate the lockable retractor

and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to put
weight on the child seat, or push
on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
46 2009 Fit
Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Outer Anchor ANCHOR

Tether ANCHOR
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat.

Each rear outside seating position
has an anchorage point on the seat-
back, and the center seating position
has an anchorage point in the ceiling
near the tailgate.
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt 2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
installation, we recommend using a 1. After properly securing the child anchor, making sure the tether
tether whenever one is required or seat (see page 45), lift the head strap is not twisted.
available. restraint, then route the tether 3. Tighten the strap according to the
strap over the seat-back and seat maker's instructions.
through the head restraint legs.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 47
Using the Center Anchor

ANCHOR
ANCHOR
COVER
TETHER STRAP HOOK
3. Route the tether strap over the
1. Lower the head restraint to its head restraint, then attach the
lowest position. tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the tether strap is not
2. After properly securing the child twisted.
seat (see page 45), open the
anchor cover. 4. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker's instructions.
48 2009 Fit
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger's front

belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give instructions If a child must ride in front,
on how to check proper seat belt fit, move the vehicle seat as far
what kind of booster seat to use if back as possible, use a booster
one is needed, and important seat if needed, have the child
precautions for a child who must sit sit up properly and wear the
in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 49
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states and Canadian provinces
between the child's neck and arm? also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
possible, touching the child's
sure to check current laws in the
thighs?
states or provinces where you intend
5. Will the child be able to stay to drive.
seated like this for the whole trip?
Booster seats can be high-back or
If you answer yes to all these low-back. Whichever style you select,
questions, the child is ready to wear make sure the booster seat meets
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If federal safety standards (see page
you answer no to any question, the 35) and that you follow the booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat. seat maker's instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat until
the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
50 2009 Fit
If a child who uses a booster seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
must ride in front, move the vehicle Front while age may be one indicator of
seat as far back as possible and be The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
sure the child is wearing the seat belt Administration and Transport there are other important factors you
properly. Canada recommend that all children should consider.

age 12 and under be properly Physical Size
A child may continue using a booster
restrained in a back seat. Physically, a child must be large
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle's or If the passenger's front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
booster's seat-back. A child of this inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 14 and 49). If
height should be tall enough to use frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
the lap/shoulder belt without a serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat. unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front.
of position. Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must
part of a larger child's body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride.
injuries.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 51
If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions ● Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: ● Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child's comfort or
● Carefully read the owner's manual,
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
and make sure you understand all
crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety
effective and increase the chance
information. ● Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back of serious injury in a crash.
●
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could cause
most position. very serious injuries during a
● Have the child sit up straight, back crash. It also increases the chance
against the seat, and feet on or that the child will slide under the
near the floor. belt in a crash and be injured.
● Check that the child's seat belt is ● Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
● Supervise the child. Even mature crash.
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
52 2009 Fit
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle's exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicle's
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows

follow the information on this page. you. and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
● The vehicle is raised for an oil carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
change. unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
● You notice a change in the sound High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust.
such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
● The vehicle was in an accident that engine with the garage door closed.
may have damaged the underside. Even with the door open, run the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
engine only long enough to move the 4. Set the temperature control to a
vehicle out of the garage. comfortable setting.
2009 Fit 53
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death.
Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner),
contact your dealer for a replacement.
SUN VISORS
U.S. models Canadian models
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
54 2009 Fit
Safety Labels
HOOD RADIATOR CAP DOORJAMBS

U.S. models U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian models
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 55
56 2009 Fit
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations .......................... 58 Immobilizer System ...................... 79
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel .......................... 59 Ignition Switch .............................. 80
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators .......... 60 Door Locks ................................... 81
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges.......................................... 68 Power Door Locks .................... 81
controls are within easy reach. Trip Meter ................................ 69 Childproof Door Locks .............. 82
Current Fuel Mileage ................ 70 Auto Door Locking/

Average Fuel Mileage ............... 70 Unlocking ............................. 83
Odometer.................................. 70 Auto Door Locking ................... 83
Fuel Gauge ............................... 70 Auto Door Unlocking ................ 85
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ......... 70 Tailgate ......................................... 88
Maintenance Minder ................ 71 Remote Transmitter ...................... 90
Controls Near the Steering Seats ............................................. 93
Wheel ....................................... 72 Power Windows .......................... 100
Windshield Wipers and Mirrors ....................................... 101
Washers ................................ 73 Parking Brake ............................. 102
Windshield Wipers ................... 73 Interior Convenience Items ......... 104
Rear Window Wiper and Lower Glove Box .................... 105
Washer ................................. 73 Upper Glove Box..................... 105
Turn Signal and Headlights .......... 74 Beverage Holders ................... 106
Headlights .................................... 75 Seat Under Box ....................... 106
Instrument Panel Brightness ........ 76 Accessory Power Socket ......... 106
Hazard Warning Button ................ 76 Sun Visor ................................ 106
Rear Window Defogger ................. 76 Interior Lights ............................. 107
Steering Wheel Adjustment .......... 77
Keys and Locks ............................. 78
2009 Fit 57
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 60) AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 115, 143)
GAUGES (P. 68) NAVIGATION SYSTEMꭧ
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 101)
USB ADAPTER CABLEꭧ

(P. 130, 137, 171, 178)
DOOR LOCK TAB
(P. 81)
POWER DOOR
LOCK MASTER SWITCHꭧ
(P. 81) HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLSꭧ
(P. 110)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P. 100)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(P. 200) (P. 219)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Vehicle with navigation system is shown. PARKING BRAKE (P. 102) (P. 217)
ꭧ: If equipped
58 2009 Fit
Instrument Panel
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P. 65) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P. 64)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P. 65) CRUISE MAIN INDICATORꭧ (P. 65)
ꭧ
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 66, 193)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P. 31, 61)
FOG LIGHT INDICATORꭧ (P. 64)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATORꭧ (P. 64)
SYSTEM INDICATORꭧ (P. 67)

TPMS INDICATORꭧ (P. 64)
VSA OFF INDICATORꭧ
(P. 67) DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN
ELECTRIC POWER INDICATOR (P. 62)
STEERING (EPS)
INDICATOR (P. 62) SEAT BELT REMINDER
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P. 60)
INDICATOR (P. 66)
WASHER LEVEL
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATORꭧ (P. 65)
INDICATOR (P. 63)
MALFUNCTION LOW FUEL INDICATOR

INDICATOR LAMP (P. 304) (P. 62)
CHARGING SYSTEM CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P. 60, 303) INDICATORꭧ (P. 65) PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (P. 60, 305)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P. 66)
INDICATOR (P. 60, 303)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P. 63) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 30, 61) INDICATOR (P. 62)
ꭧ: If equipped
2009 Fit 59
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many U.S. Canada Seat Belt Reminder
indicators that give you important Parking Brake Indicator
information about your vehicle. and Brake This indicator comes on when you
System Indicator turn the ignition switch to the ON
Malfunction Indicator (Red)
Lamp (II) position. It reminds you and your
This indicator has two functions: passengers to fasten your seat belts.
See page 304. A beeper also sounds if you have not
1. It comes on when you turn the fastened your seat belt.
Low Oil Pressure ignition switch to the ON (II)
Indicator position. It is a reminder to check If you turn the ignition switch to the
the parking brake. A beeper ON (II) position before fastening
The engine can be severely damaged your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
if this indicator flashes or stays on sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released. and the indicator flashes. If you do
when the engine is running. For not fasten your seat belts before the
more information, see page 303. Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the beeper stops, the indicator stops
Charging System brakes and tires. flashing but remains on.
Indicator 2. If it remains on after you have fully
If this indicator comes on when the released the parking brake while
engine is running, the battery is not the engine is running, or if it
being charged. For more comes on while driving, there
information, see page 303. could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 305.
60 2009 Fit
If your front passenger does not Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada

fasten their seat belt, the indicator System Indicator Side Airbag Off
comes on about 6 seconds after the This indicator comes on briefly when Indicator
ignition switch is turned to the ON you turn the ignition switch to the
(II) position. This indicator comes on briefly when
ON (II) position. If it comes on at any you turn the ignition switch to the
If either of you do not fasten your other time, it indicates a potential ON (II) position. If it comes on at any

seat belt while driving, the beeper problem with your front airbags. This other time, it indicates that the
will sound and the indicator will flash indicator will also alert you to a passenger's side airbag has
again at regular intervals. For more potential problem with your side automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 18. airbags, passenger's side airbag information, see page 31.
cutoff system, side curtain airbags,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver's seat position sensor, or the
front passenger's weight sensors.
For more information, see page 30.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 61
Anti-lock Brake System Electric Power Steering Low Fuel Indicator

(ABS) Indicator (EPS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on when This indicator comes on as a
a few seconds when you turn the you turn the ignition switch to the ON reminder that you must refuel soon.
ignition switch to the ON (II) (II) position and goes off after the
engine starts. If it comes on at any When the indicator comes on, there
position, and when the ignition is about 1.64 US gal (6.2 L) of fuel
switch is turned to the START (III) other time, there is a problem in the
electric power steering system. If this remaining in the tank before the
position. If it comes on at any other needle reaches E. There is a small
time, there is a problem with the happens, stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn off the engine. Reset the reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
ABS. If this happens, have your when the needle does reach E.
system by restarting the engine. The
vehicle checked at a dealer. With this indicator will not turn off immediately.
indicator on, your vehicle still has If it does not go off after driving a short Door and Tailgate Open
normal braking ability but no anti- distance, or comes back on again while Indicator
lock function. For more information, driving, take the vehicle to your dealer
see page 231. This indicator comes on if any door
to have it checked. With the indicator or the tailgate is not closed tightly.
on, the EPS may be turned off, making
the vehicle harder to steer.
If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering in order to prevent damage to
the steering box caused by
overheating.
62 2009 Fit
High Temperature Low Temperature Turn Signal and

Indicator Indicator Hazard Warning
This indicator monitors the This indicator monitors the Indicators
temperature of the engine coolant. It temperature of the engine coolant. If The left or right turn signal indicator
normally comes on when you turn the there is no problem, this indicator blinks when you signal a lane change
ignition switch to the ON (II) position comes on when the engine is cold. If or turn. If an indicator does not blink

and goes off after a few seconds. In it comes on when the engine is warm or blinks rapidly, it usually means
normal driving conditions, this (normal operating temperature), one of the turn signal bulbs is burned
indicator should not blink or stay on. In have the vehicle inspected by your out (see page 264). Replace the bulb
severe driving conditions, such as very dealer as soon as possible. as soon as possible, since other
hot weather or a long period of uphill
drivers cannot see that you are
driving, this indicator may blink. This
means the engine coolant temperature signaling.
is high. If the indicator begins to blink When you press the hazard warning
while you are driving, be sure to slow button, both turn signal indicators
down to prevent overheating. If the and all turn signals on the outside of
indicator stays on, pull safely to the the vehicle flash.
side of the road and turn off the engine.
See page 301 for instructions and
precautions on checking the engine's
cooling system.
Do not drive the vehicle while the
indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 63
Low Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring Lights On Indicator

Indicator System (TPMS) Indicator
U.S. models only U.S. models only This indicator reminds you that the
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for exterior lights are on. It comes on
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the when the light switch is in either the
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) or position. If you turn the
position. If it comes on while driving, position. ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
it indicates that one or more of your (I) or LOCK (0) position without
vehicle's tires are significantly low on If this indicator comes on and stays turning off the light switch, this
pressure. on at any other time, or if it does not indicator will stay on. A reminder
come on when you turn the ignition chime will also sound when you open
If this happens, pull to the side of the switch to the ON (II) position, there the driver's door.
road when it is safe, check which tire is a problem with the TPMS. With
has lost the pressure, and determine this indicator on, the low tire Fog Light Indicator
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, pressure indicator will not come on
replace the flat tire with the compact when a tire loses pressure. Take the
On Sport model
spare (see page 284), and have the vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked. This indicator comes on when you
flat tire repaired as soon as possible. turn on the fog lights. For more
If two or more tires are underinflated, information, see page 75.
call a professional towing service
(see page 311). For more
64 2009 Fit
High Beam Indicator Cruise Main Indicator Washer Level Indicator
This indicator comes on with the On Sport model and Canadian LX model Canadian models only
high beam headlights. For more This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on when the
information, see page 75. turn on the cruise control system by washer fluid level is low. Add washer
pressing the CRUISE button (see fluid when you see this indicator
This indicator comes on with

page 194). come on (see page 258).
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on Cruise Control Indicator
(see page 75).
Daytime Running Lights On Sport model and Canadian LX model
Indicator This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page 194
If this indicator comes on when the for information on operating the
ignition switch is turned to the ON cruise control.
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the circuit. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 65
Maintenance Minder Immobilizer System Security System Indicator

Indicator Indicator
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator comes on for a few This indicator comes on briefly when
seconds when you turn the ignition you turn the ignition switch to the
switch to the ON (II) position. It ON (II) position. It will go off if you
reminds you that it is time to take have inserted a properly coded
your vehicle in for scheduled ignition key. If it is not a properly
maintenance. The maintenance main coded key, the indicator will blink,
items and sub items will be displayed and the engine's fuel system will be
in the information display. See page disabled (see page 79).
245 for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the On Sport model
required maintenance service. This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page 193
for more information on the security
system.
66 2009 Fit
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) VSA Off Indicator

System Indicator
If equipped
If equipped It comes on as a reminder that you
This indicator normally comes on for have turned off the vehicle stability

a few seconds when you turn the assist (VSA) system.
ignition switch to the ON (II)
This indicator normally comes on for
position and when the ignition switch
a few seconds when you turn the
is turned to the START (III) position.
It flashes when VSA is active (see position and when the ignition switch
page 233). is turned to the START (III) position.
See page 233 for more information
If it comes on and stays on at any
on the VSA system.
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page 233
for more information on the VSA
system.
2009 Fit 67
Gauges
INFORMATION DISPLAY TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE
ODOMETER/TRIP METER/CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE/ SELECT/RESET KNOB

U.S. model is shown. AVERAGE FUEL MILEAGE/CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR
68 2009 Fit
Gauges
Trip Meter
CURRENT FUEL This meter shows the number of
MILEAGE
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
ODOMETER TRIP METER AVERAGE FUEL ENGINE OIL LIFE driven since you last reset it.
MILEAGE
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset

knob until the number resets to
‘‘ 0.0 ’’.
When you reset the trip meter,
average fuel mileage is reset
simultaneously.
The information display consists of To switch the display, press and

two segments. The upper segment release the select/reset knob
displays current fuel mileage, repeatedly. When you turn the
maintenance item code(s), and the ignition switch to the ON (II)
lower segment displays the trip position the last selection is
meter, odometer, average fuel displayed.
mileage, and engine oil life.
2009 Fit 69
Gauges
Current Fuel Mileage Odometer Check Fuel Cap Indicator

This shows your current fuel mileage The odometer shows the total If the fuel fill cap is loose or missing,
in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). distance your vehicle has been a ‘‘ CHECK FUEL CAP ’’ message
Average Fuel Mileage driven. It measures miles in U.S. appears on the information display
models and kilometers in Canadian after you start the engine. The
This shows your vehicle's average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 models. It is illegal under U.S. message changes from CHECK, to
federal law and Canadian provincial FUEL, to CAP repeatedly.
km (Canada) since you last reset the
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
trip meter. Turn the engine off and confirm the
alter the odometer with the intent to
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
When you reset a trip meter, the change the number of miles or
the cap, then retighten it until it
average fuel mileage for that trip kilometers indicated.
clicks at least once. You can cycle the
meter also resets.
Fuel Gauge message off of the display by
This shows how much fuel you have. pressing the select/reset knob
It may show slightly more or less repeatedly, but this message will be
than the actual amount. The needle displayed each time the engine is
returns to the bottom after you turn started. It will take several days of
off the ignition. normal driving for the vehicle to turn
the warning off.
Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
70 2009 Fit
Gauges
If the system still detects a loose or Maintenance Minder

missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction The information display in the
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. Turn instrument panel shows you the
the engine off, and check or engine oil life and maintenance
retighten the fuel fill cap until it service items when the ignition
clicks at least once. The MIL goes switch is in the ON (II) position. This

out after several days of normal information helps to keep you aware
driving once the cap is tightened or of the periodic maintenance your
replaced. If it does not go out, have vehicle needs for continued trouble-
your dealer inspect the vehicle. For free driving. Refer to page 245 for
more information, see page 304. more information.
2009 Fit 71
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
PADDLE SHIFTER (DOWNSHIFT)ꭧ2 HORNꭧ1 INSTRUMENT PANEL PADDLE SHIFTER WINDSHIELD

(P. 224) BRIGHTNESS (UPSHIFT)ꭧ2 WIPERS/WASHERS
(P. 76) (P. 224) (P. 73)
HEADLIGHTS/ HAZARD WARNING

TURN SIGNAL/ BUTTON
FOG LIGHTSꭧ2 (P. 76)
(P. 74) PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
REMOTE AUDIO (P. 31)
CONTROL BUTTONSꭧ2
(P. 189) REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTONꭧ2
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (P. 76/102)
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONSꭧ3
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P. 190)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
OFF SWITCHꭧ2
(P. 234) STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
ADJUSTMENTS BUTTONSꭧ2 (P. 106)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown. (P. 77) (P. 194)
ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
ꭧ2: If equipped.
ꭧ3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
72 2009 Fit
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers MIST － The wipers run at high Rear Window Wiper and Washer
speed until you release the lever.
OFF － The wipers are not activated.
The wipers operate every
INT －
few seconds.

LO － The wipers run at low speed.
HI － The wipers run at high speed.
Windshield Pull the wiper control
Washers － lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers
spray until you release
1. MIST the lever. The wipers 1. OFF
run at low speed, then When you turn the wiper switch to
2. OFF complete one more the ‘‘ OFF ’’ position, the wiper will
3. INT － Intermittent sweep after you release return to its parked position.
the lever.
4. LO － Low speed 2. Rotate the switch clockwise to turn
the rear window wiper ON.
5. HI － High speed
3. Hold past ON to turn the rear
6. Windshield washers
window wiper on and to spray the
Push the right lever up or down to rear window washer.
select a position.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 73
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
4. Hold past OFF to turn the rear Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal － Push down on the
window wiper on and to spary the left lever to signal a left turn and up
rear window washer. The rear to signal a right turn. To signal a lane
window wiper makes one more change, push lightly on the lever and
sweep after you release the switch. hold it. The lever will return to the
center when you release it or
When you shift the transmission to
complete a turn.
the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the
windshield washer.
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and interior lights
4. Headlights
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams
On Sport model
7. Fog lights off
8. Fog lights on
74 2009 Fit
Headlights
Headlights － Turning the switch to High Beams － Push the lever Daytime Running Lights
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the forward and the high beam indicator With the headlight switch off or in
parking lights, taillights, instrument will come on (see page 65). Pull it the position, the high beam
panel lights, side-marker lights, and back to return to low beams. headlights and the high beam
rear license plate lights. indicator come on with reduced
To flash the high beams, pull the
brightness when you turn the
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ lever back lightly, then release it.

position turns on the headlights. The high beams will stay on as long
position and release the parking
as you hold the lever back.
When the light switch is in the brake. They remain on until you turn
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the lights Fog Lights the ignition switch off, even if you set
on indicator comes on as a reminder. On Sport model the parking brake.
This indicator stays on if you leave Turn the fog lights on and off by
The headlights revert to normal
the light switch on and turn the turning the switch next to the
operation when you turn them on
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY headlight switch.
with the switch.
(I) or the LOCK (0) position.
You can use the fog lights only when
If you leave the lights on with the key the headlights are on low beam.They
removed from the ignition switch, will go off when the headlights are
you will hear a reminder chime when turned off.
you open the driver’s door.
2009 Fit 75
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL KNOB
You can change the instrument panel Push the button to turn on the The rear window defogger will clear
brightness only when the ignition hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the
switch is in the ON (II) position and flashers). This causes all four outside window. Push the defogger button to
the light switch is on. turn signals and both turn indicators turn it on and off. The indicator in the
Turn the knob on the lower part of the in the instrument panel to flash. Use button comes on to show the
instrument panel to adjust the the hazard warning lights if you need defogger is on. You must manually
brightness. to park in a dangerous area near shut off the rear window defogger
heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is when it is no longer needed.
You will hear a beep when maximum disabled.
or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the
maximum level is canceled by turning
the knob a click to the left.
76 2009 Fit
Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make sure the rear window is clear Steering Wheel Adjustment

and you have good visibility before Make any steering wheel adjustment
starting to drive. before you start driving.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,

always wipe side-to-side. Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
If equipped cause you to lose control of the
Pushing this button also turns the vehicle and be seriously injured
mirror heaters on or off. For more in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only 3. Push the lever forward fully to lock
when the vehicle is stopped. the steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely
1. Pull the lever under the steering locked the steering wheel in place
column toward you until it stops. by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward your
face. Make sure you can see the
instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
2009 Fit 77
Keys and Locks
On Sport model and Canadian LX model All models except Sport model and You should have received a key
Canadian LX model number tag with your keys. You will
KEY NUMBER TAG KEYS WITH need this key number if you ever
TRANSMITTER
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
KEY NUMBER TAG KEYS only Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the circuits
are damaged.
● Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Your vehicle comes with the two
ignition keys. ● Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
● Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
All models except Sport model and
Canadian LX model
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
78 2009 Fit
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine's fuel following two conditions: (1) This device
Do not attempt to alter this system or may not cause harmful interference, and
system is disabled.
add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including

the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle inoperable. interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on operation.
If you have lost your key and cannot
briefly, then go off. If the indicator Changes or modifications not expressly
start the engine, contact your dealer.
starts to blink, it means the system approved by the party responsible for
does not recognize the coding of the compliance could void the user's
key. Turn the ignition switch to the authority to operate the equipment.
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
Always take the ignition key with you This device complies with Industry
reinsert it, and turn the ignition Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
switch to the ON (II) position again. whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
subject to the following two conditions:
The system may not recognize your (1) this device may not cause
key's coding if another immobilizer interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key undesired operation of the device.
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
2009 Fit 79
Ignition Switch
ACCESSORY (I) － You can operate

the audio system and the accessory
power socket in this position. Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
ON (II) － This is the normal key locks the steering. This can
position when driving. Several of the cause you to lose control of the
indicators on the instrument panel vehicle.
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the Remove the key from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) ignition switch only when
position. parked.
START (III) － Use this position
The ignition switch has four positions: only to start the engine. The switch
LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), returns to the ON (II) position when
and START (III). you let go of the key.
LOCK (0) － You can insert or remove You will hear a reminder beeper if
the key only in this position. To turn you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the key, push it in slightly. If your the ACCESSORY (I) position and
vehicle has an automatic transmission, open the driver's door. Remove the
the shift lever must also be in Park. key to turn off the beeper.
If the front wheels are turned, the anti- If your vehicle has an automatic
theft lock may make it difficult to turn
the key. Firmly turn the steering wheel transmission, the shift lever must be
to the left or right as you turn the key. in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
80 2009 Fit
Door Locks
LOCK TAB When the door is unlocked, you can Power Door Locks
To lock see the red indicator on the lock tab
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
above the inner door handle.

UNLOCK
To unlock
LOCK
RED INDICATOR
Each door has a lock tab next to the
inside door handle. Pull the lock tab
All models except Canadian DX and
to lock the door, and push it forward DX-A models
to unlock the door. To lock the doors and the tailgate,
All models except Sport model and
On Canadian DX and DX-A models Canadian LX model push the top of the master door lock
To lock the passenger's door when Each front door can be locked or switch on the driver's door, pull the
getting out of the vehicle, pull the unlocked with the ignition key. lock tab rearward on the driver's
lock tab and close the door. To lock door, or use the key in the outside
the driver's door, pull and hold the door lock on the driver's door.
outside door handle, then pull the Pushing the bottom of the master
lock tab. Release the handle, then door lock switch unlocks all doors
close the door. and the tailgate.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 81
Door Locks
The lock tab on each passenger's Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks
door locks and unlocks only that If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, lockout prevention LEVER
door. Pushing forward the lock tab
on the driver's door unlocks only that will not allow you to lock the driver's
door. To unlock only the driver's door. With any door open and the Unlock
door from the outside, turn the key key in the ignition switch, locking
and release it. If you turn it again, the with master door lock switch is
remaining doors and the tailgate disabled. If the driver's door is Lock
unlock. closed, the lock tab on the driver's
door is not disabled. Pulling the
To lock a passenger's door when driver's lock tab rearward will lock all
getting out of the vehicle, pull the doors. If you try to lock an open
lock tab rearward and close the door. driver's door by pulling the lock tab
To lock the driver's door, remove rearward, the driver's door lock tab
key from ignition switch and pull the pops out and unlocks the driver's The childproof door locks are
lock tab rearward or push the top of door. designed to prevent children seated
the master door lock switch, then in the rear from accidentally opening
close the door. the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, pull the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
82 2009 Fit
Door Locks
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking To turn off the Auto Door Lock
On all models except Canadian DX and The auto door locking feature has modes:
DX-A three possible settings:
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors and tailgate to
● The auto door locking is
automatically lock and unlock. There deactivated all the time.

are default settings for each of these ●
All doors and tailgate lock
features. You can turn off or change whenever you move the shift lever
the settings for these features as out of the Park (P) position (A/T
described on the following pages. vehicles).
When you customize the setting, ● All doors and tailgate lock when
make sure your vehicle is parked the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph
safely, the engine is off, and apply the (15 km/h).
parking brake. Make all settings This is the default setting.
before you start driving. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver's
door.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 83
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the front of the To program the Park Lock mode: 3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the Locks all doors and tailgate when the master door lock switch on the
driver's door until you hear a click shift lever is moved out of the Park (P) driver's door. You will hear a click.
(after about 5 seconds). position (A/T vehicles only). Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds).
seconds, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position. 4. Release the switch, and within 5
the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the

Park (P) position.
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver's door.
84 2009 Fit
Door Locks
To program the Drive Lock mode: 3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the Auto Door Unlocking
Locks all doors and tailgate when the brake pedal, and move the shift The auto door unlocking feature has
vehicle's speed reaches about 9 mph (15 lever out of the Park (P) position. five possible settings:
km/h).
4. Push and hold the front of the ● The auto door unlocking is
master door lock switch on the deactivated all the time.
driver's door. You will hear a click.

●
On A/T vehicles, the driver's door
Keep holding the switch until you
unlocks when you move the shift
hear another click (after about 5
lever to the Park (P) position.
seconds).
This is the default setting.
5. Release the switch, and within 5 ● All doors and tailgate unlock when
you move the shift lever to the
the ACCESSORY (I) position. On
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
A/T vehicles, move the shift lever to
A/T models the Park (P) position. ● The driver's door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
LOCK (0) position.
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). position.
This is the default setting on M/T
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON vehicles.
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver's door. ● All doors and tailgate unlock
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 85
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock 4. Release the switch, and within 5 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
modes: seconds, turn the ignition switch to (II) position, and make sure to
the LOCK (0) position. close the driver's door.
To program the Park Unlock mode: 3. Push and hold the rear of the
Unlocks the driver's door or all doors master door lock switch on the
and tailgate when the shift lever is driver's door. You will hear a click.
moved into the Park (P) position (A/T Continue to hold the switch:
vehicles only).
● Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver's door unlock
feature.
● Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the to activate all doors and tailgate
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). unlock feature.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 4. Release the switch, and within 5
(II) position, and open the driver's seconds, turn the ignition switch to
door. the LOCK (0) position.
3. Push and hold the rear of the 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
master door lock switch on the Park (P) position.
driver's door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
86 2009 Fit
Door Locks
To program the Ignition Switch 3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold the Even if your vehicle's battery is
Unlock mode: brake pedal, then move the shift removed or goes dead, the system
Unlocks the driver's door or all doors lever out of the Park (P) position. keeps the auto door lock/unlock
and tailgate when the ignition switch is setting which you selected.
moved out of the ON (II) position. 4. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver's door. You will hear a click.

Continue to hold the switch:
● Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver's door unlock
feature.
● Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
A/T models to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the 5. Release the switch, and within 5
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles). seconds, turn the ignition switch to
the ACCESSORY (I) position. On
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON A/T vehicles, move the shift lever to
(II) position, and make sure to the Park (P) position.
close the driver's door.
LOCK (0) position.
2009 Fit 87
Tailgate
All models except Canadian DX and

DX-A models
The tailgate will lock or unlock when
you lock or unlock the driver's door
by using the key, the lock tab on the
driver's door, the master door lock LOCK
switch or the remote transmitter (if
equipped). UNLOCK
HANDLE
KEY
All models except Sport model and To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
Canadian LX model then lift up.
You can lock or unlock the tailgate
with the key.
88 2009 Fit
Tailgate
Unlocking the Tailgate
Lock Unlock

TAILGATE HANDLE
To close the tailgate, hold the tailgate Push the release lever to the right as
handle, lower the tailgate, then press shown.
On Sport model and Canadian LX model
down on the back edge.
If the power door lock system cannot If you need to unlock the tailgate
Keep the tailgate closed at all times unlock the tailgate, unlock it manually, it means there is a
while driving to avoid damaging the manually. problem with the tailgate. Have the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas vehicle checked by your dealer.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
from getting into the interior. See
cover, then use a small flat-tipped
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
screwdriver to remove the cover on
53.
the back of the tailgate.
2009 Fit 89
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK － Press this button once PANIC － Press this button for
LED
LOCK
to unlock the driver's door. Push it about 2 seconds to attract attention:
BUTTON twice to unlock the remaining doors the horn will sound, and the exterior
UNLOCK and the tailgate. Some exterior lights lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
BUTTON will flash twice each time you press To cancel panic mode, press any
the button. other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch to the ON (II) position.
switch is in the door activated
PANIC position) will come on when you
BUTTON press the UNLOCK button. If you do
not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, the light fades
On Sport model and Canadian LX model out. If you relock the doors and the
LOCK － Press this button once to tailgate with the remote transmitter
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
exterior lights will flash once. When light will go off immediately.
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, the horn will sound to verify If you do not open any door or the
that the doors and the tailgate are tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
locked and the security system (if automatically relock and the security
equipped) has set. You cannot lock system (if equipped) will set.
the doors and the tailgate if any door
or the tailgate is not fully closed or
the key is in the ignition switch.
90 2009 Fit
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter Battery

● Avoid dropping or throwing the If it takes several pushes on the
transmitter. button to lock or unlock the doors
●
Protect the transmitter from and the tailgate, replace the battery
extreme temperature. as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616

●
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
● If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer. SCREW
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 91
Remote Transmitter
BATTERY 4. Remove the old battery, and insert As required by the FCC: This device
a new battery into the back of the complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
cover with the ＋ side facing down. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not
An improperly disposed of battery cause harmful interference, and (2) this
can hurt the environment. Always device must accept any interference
confirm local regulations for received, including interference that may
battery disposal. cause undesired operation.
5. Install the parts in reverse order. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying This device complies with Industry
its middle seam with your Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
fingernail. subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
3. Inside the transmitter, separate the interference, and (2) this device must
inner cover from the keypad by accept any interference that may cause
carefully prying on the edge with a undesired operation of the device.
coin.
92 2009 Fit
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments

See pages 11 － 12 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Make all seat adjustments before you

start driving.
To adjust the seat forward or To change the seat-back angle, pull

backward, pull up on the bar under up the lever on the outside of the
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move seat bottom.
the seat to the desired position, and
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
release the bar. Try to move the seat
rock it back and forth to make sure it
to make sure it is locked in position.
is locked in position.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 93
Seats
Armrest Rear Seat Adjustments Head Restraints

See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
RELEASE LEVER
On Sport model and Canadian LX model You can adjust the angle of the rear
The driver's seat has an armrest on seat-backs separately. To change the
the side of the seat-back. To use, seat-back angle, pull up the release
pivot it down. lever on the outer side of the seat-
back.
They are most effective when you

adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant's head rests against
the center of the restraint.
94 2009 Fit
Seats
Front Rear Center Removing the Head Restraint

CUSHION CUSHION
Position To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.

Failure to reinstall the head
LEGS RELEASE BUTTON LEGS RELEASE BUTTON restraints can result in severe
SEAT-BACK SEAT-BACK
injury during a crash.
Adjusting the Head Restraint When a passenger is seated in the
The head restraints adjust for height. rear center seating position, the Always replace the head
You need both hands to adjust a center head restraint should be restraints before driving.
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it adjusted up or down, to match the
while driving. To raise it, pull passenger's height.
upward. To lower the restraint, push When reinstalling a head restraint,
the release button sideways, and put the legs back in place. Then
push the restraint down. adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressig the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks in
position when you reinstall it.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 95
Seats
Active Head Restraints After a collision, the activated restraint For a head restraint system to work
should return to its normal position. properly:
If the restraints do not return to their ● Do not hang any items on the head
normal position, or in the event of a restraints, or from the restraint
severe collision, have the vehicle legs.
inspected by a Honda dealer.
●
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
●
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
● Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
The driver's and front passenger's
seats have active head restraints. If the
vehicle is struck severely from the rear,
the occupant properly secured with the
seat belt will be pushed against the
seat-back and the head restraint will
automatically move forward.
This reduces the distance between the
restraint and the occupant’s head. It
also helps protect the occupants
against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.
96 2009 Fit
Seats
Folding the Rear Seat Up Folding the Rear Seat Down

The left and right rear seat cushions LEG The rear seat-backs can be folded
can be lifted up separately to make down for more cargo room.
room for cargo.
꓈ Each side folds down separately, so
Remove any items from the seat you can still carry a passenger in the
before you fold up the seat cushion. rear outer seating position.

꓇
Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back.
FLOOR GUIDE
Make sure there are no items on the
LATCH
꓉
floor before folding down the seats.
꓇ To return the seat cushion to its
original position, first make sure
꓈ there are no items on the floor, then
pull up the seat leg fully, and push
down the seat cushion slowly while
holding it with your hands. Set the
seat leg in the floor guide. A latch
Pull up the rear seat cushion, and comes out when the leg is set
fold the seat leg down. Push the seat properly.
cushion firmly against the seat-back
to lock it.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 97
Seats
Do not put any heavy items on the

seat-back when it is folded down.
While lifting the seat-back, the seat
cushion may come up with it. To
secure the seat cushion, see page 97.
Make sure the seat-back and seat
cushion are locked securely and all
rear shoulder belts are positioned in
front of the rear seat-backs. In the
LATCH PLATE center seating position of the rear
RELEASE LEVER seat, be sure the detachable anchor
When you fold down the driver's side 1. Lower the rear head restraints to is latched securely before using the
rear seat, use the latch plate to its lowest position. If you fold seat belt (see page 99).
release the center seat belt from the down the driver's side seat-back, Make sure all items in the cargo area
detachable anchor (see page 99). also adjust the rear center head are secured. Loose items can fly
Allow the seat belt to retract into the restraint to its lowest position. forward and cause injury if you have
holder on the ceiling, and store the to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
2. Pull up the release lever on the
buckles in it. on page 208).
outside of the seat-back.
3. Fold the seat-back forward.
98 2009 Fit
Seats
Detachable Anchor LATCH PLATE SMALL LATCH PLATE

The seat belt in the rear center seat
is equipped with a detachable
anchor.
This allows the center seat belt to be
unlatched when the driver's side rear ANCHOR

BUCKLE
seat is folded.
Using a seat belt with the SMALL LATCH PLATE TRIANGLE MARKS
detachable anchor unlatched Pull out the small latch plate and the
increases the chance of serious Line up the triangle marks on the
latch plate from each holding slot in small latch plate and anchor buckle
injury or death in a crash. the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt when reattaching the belt and
to extend it. buckle.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable Tug on the seat belt to verify that the
anchor is correctly latched. detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 99
Seats, Power Windows
ANCHOR Power Windows

BUCKLE
DRIVER'S WINDOW SWITCH Closing a power window on
someone's hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are

away from the windows before
closing them.
LATCH PLATE
When you push the MAIN switch in,
To unlatch the detachable anchor, MAIN SWITCH the switch is off, and the passenger
insert the latch plate into the slot on Turn the ignition switch to the ON windows cannot be raised or
the side of the anchor buckle. Store (II) position to raise or lower any lowered. To cancel this feature, push
the detachable anchor and seat belt window. To open a window, push the on the switch again to get it to pop
latch plates in the retractor housing. switch down and hold it. Release the out. Keep the MAIN switch off when
switch when you want the window to you have children in the vehicle so
stop. Pull back on the switch and they do not injure themselves by
hold it to close the window. operating the windows
unintentionally.
The windows will operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the ignition
switch. Opening either front door
cancels this function.
100 2009 Fit

Power Windows, Mirrors
AUTO － To open or close the Mirrors Adjusting the Power Mirrors

driver's window, push or pull the
TAB SELECTOR SWITCH
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the

window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
AUTO REVERSE － If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch Keep the inside and outside mirrors 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
again. clean and adjusted for best visibility. (II) position.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the Be sure to adjust the mirrors before 2. Move the selector switch to L
window is almost closed. You should you start driving. (driver's side) or R (passenger's
always check that all passengers and The inside mirror has day and night side).
objects are away from the window positions. The night position reduces
before closing it. glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 101

Mirrors, Parking Brake
3. Push the appropriate edge of the Heated Mirrors Parking Brake

adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the adjustment
switch off to keep your settings.
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON PARKING BRAKE LEVER

On Canadian Sport and LX models To apply the parking brake, pull the
The outside mirrors are heated to lever up fully. To release it, pull up
remove fog and frost. With the slightly, push the button, and lower
ignition switch in the ON (II) the lever. The parking brake
position, turn on the heaters by indicator on the instrument panel
pressing the button. The indicator in should go out when the parking
the button comes on as a reminder. brake is fully released (see page 60).
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
102 2009 Fit

Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.

2009 Fit 103
Interior Convenience Items
COAT HOOK VANITY MIRRORS

ꭧ1
SUN VISOR
SEAT-BACK POCKET FRONT DOOR POCKET
REAR SIDE POCKET
(RIGHT SIDE) ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
UPPER GLOVE BOX
BEVERAGE
HOLDER
LOWER GLOVE BOX

CARGO FLOOR BOXꭧ2 SEAT UNDER BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDERS PASSENGER'S TRAY
ꭧ1: If equipped
ꭧ2: All Canadian models with automatic transmission CENTER POCKET
104 2009 Fit

Lower Glove Box Upper Glove Box

An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.

Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Open the lower glove box by pulling Open the upper glove box by pulling
the bottom of the handle. Close it up on the lever. Close it with a firm
with a firm push. push.
2009 Fit 105

Beverage Holders Seat Under Box Accessory Power Socket

This socket is intended to supply
KNOB power for 12 volt DC accessories that
are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).
To use the accessory power socket,
pull up the cover. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
It will not power an automotive type
cigarette lighter element.
SEAT UNDER BOX MARKS

Sun Visor
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Be careful when you are using the Pull up the driver's side rear seat When using the sun visor for the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid cushion (see page 97). side window, remove the support rod
that is very hot can scald you or your Open the seat under box by turning from the clip, and swing it out.
passengers. Liquid can also spill the knob. Make sure you put the sun visor
from the door pocket beverage To close the seat under box, turn the back in place when you are getting
holders when you open or close the knob and align the marks. into or out of the vehicle.
doors. Use only resealable containers
in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
106 2009 Fit

Interior Lights
Ceiling Light After all doors are closed tightly, the

light fades out in about 30 seconds.
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON The ceiling light (with the switch in
the door activated position) comes on
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch. If you do not open a

OFF door, the light fades out in about 30
seconds.
If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after 15
minutes.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch: ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
● Open any door.
● Unlock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or the remote
transmitter (if equipped).
2009 Fit 107

108 2009 Fit

Main Menu
Features
The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating, and A/C ............. 110 Disc Player Error Messages
system in your vehicle provides a Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation
comfortable driving environment in (Models without navigation system) ............................... 157
all weather conditions. system) ............................... 115 Playing a PC card (Models with
Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system) .................. 158
The standard audio system has many
navigation system) .................. 122 Playing an iPod® (Models with
features. This section describes
Disc Player Error Messages navigation system) .................. 170
those features and how to use them.
(Models without navigation iPod® Error Messages (Models
Features
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system) ............................... 128 with navigation system) .......... 176
system that requires a code number Playing an iPod® (Models without Playing a USB Flash Memory
to enable it. navigation system) .................. 129 Device (Models with
The security system helps to iPod® Error Messages (Models navigation system) .............. 177
discourage vandalism and theft of without navigation system) ..... 135 USB Flash Memory Device Error
your vehicle. Playing a USB Flash Memory Messages (Models with
Device (Models without navigation system) .............. 183
navigation system) .............. 136 FM/AM Radio Reception ............ 184
USB Flash Memory Device Error Protecting Your Discs ................. 186
Messages (Models without Remote Audio Controls ............... 189
navigation system) .............. 142 Auxiliary Input Jack .................... 190
Playing the AM/FM Radio Radio Theft Protection ................ 191
(Models with navigation Setting the Clock......................... 192
system) ............................... 143 Security System .......................... 193
Playing a Disc (Models with Cruise Control ............................ 194
navigation system) .................. 149
2009 Fit 109

Vents, Heating, and A/C
FAN CONTROL DIAL
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/

HEATED MIRRORS BUTTONꭧ
AIR CONDITIONING REAR WINDOW

BUTTONꭧ DEFOGGER BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL DIAL FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION LEVER
ꭧ: If equipped
110 2009 Fit

Airflow Controls The outside air intakes for the Mode Control Dial
Fan Control Dial heating and cooling system are at the Use the mode control dial to select
Turn this dial to increase or decrease base of the windshield. Keep this the vents the air flows from. Some air
the fan speed and airflow. area clear of leaves and other debris. will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes.
Temperature Control Dial The system should be left in fresh air
Turning this dial clockwise increases mode under almost all conditions. Air flows from the center and
the temperature of the airflow. Keeping the system in recirculation corner vents in the dashboard.
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
Features
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button can cause the windows to fog up. Airflow is divided between the
If equipped vents in the dashboard and the floor
This button turns the air Switch to recirculation mode when vents.
conditioning on and off. The driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air Air flows from the floor vents.
indicator in the button is on when the
A/C is on. mode. Airflow is divided between the
Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever Rear Window Defogger Button / floor vents and defroster vents at the
This lever controls the source of the base of the windshield.
air going into the system. When you This button turns the rear window Air flows from the defroster
slide the lever to the side, air is defogger on and off (see page 76). vents at the base of the windshield.
brought in from outside the vehicle On some models, this button also
(fresh air mode). When you select operates the heated outside mirrors
the side, air from the vehicle's (see page 102).
interior is sent through the system
again (recirculation mode).
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 111

When you select or , the Using the Heater Using the A/C
system automatically turns on the The heater uses engine coolant to If equipped
A/C (if equipped). You cannot turn warm the air. If the engine is cold, it Air conditioning places an extra load
the A/C off in this mode. will be several minutes before you on the engine. Check the high
feel warm air coming from the temperature indicator (see page 63).
Ventilation system. If the indicator begins to blink, turn
The flow-through ventilation system off the A/C until the indicator goes
draws in outside air, circulates it 1. Select and . off.
through the interior, then discharges 2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
it through vents near the tailgate. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with button. The indicator in the button
1. Set the temperature to the lower the temperature control dial. comes on when a fan speed is
limit. selected.
2. Make sure the A/C is off. 2. Make sure the temperature is set
3. Select and . to maximum cool.
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. 3. Select .
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select .
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
112 2009 Fit

If the interior is very warm, you can To Defog and Defrost When you select or , the
cool it down more rapidly by partially To remove fog from the inside of the system automatically turns on the
opening the windows, turning on the windows: A/C. This helps to dehumidify the air
A/C, and setting the fan to maximum 1. Set the fan to the desired speed or and to defog the windshield. In either
speed in . mode, you cannot turn off the A/C.
high for faster defrosting.
Dehumidify the Interior When you switch to another mode,
2. Select by sliding the lever. the A/C returns to its original
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in 3. Select . The system setting, either on or off, as indicated
Features
combination with the heater, it automatically turns on the A/C (if by the A/C indicator.
makes the interior warm and dry and equipped). The A/C indicator will
can prevent the windows from not come on if it was previously off.
fogging up.
4. Adjust the temperature so the
1. Turn the fan on. airflow feels warm.
2. If the A/C is off, turn it on (if 5. Select / to help clear the
equipped). rear window.
3. Select and . 6. To increase airflow to the
Adjust the temperature to your windshield, close the corner vents.
preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 113

To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice To Turn Everything Off

From the Windows Turning the fan speed control dial all
1. Set the fan and temperature the way to the left shuts the system
controls to maximum level. off.
2. Select . The system ●
Keep the system off for short
automatically turns on the A/C (if periods only.
equipped). The A/C indicator does ●
To keep stale air and mustiness
not come on if it was previously off. from collecting, you should have
3. Select . the fan running at all times.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating each vent. This sends more
warm air to the windshield defroster
vents. Once the windshield is clear,
select fresh air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
114 2009 Fit

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)
DISPLAY ꂹ ꂾ BUTTON
VOL/SELECT
Features
KNOB
POWER ( ꂻ ) BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
FM/AM BUTTON AUTO SELECT

BUTTON
TUNE/SEEK TUNE/SEEK
(ꀾ (ꀽ
SEEK) SEEK)
BUTTON BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
SOUND ( ꂼ/ꂽ ) BUTTON SCAN BUTTON

ꂺPLAY BUTTON
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 115

To Play the FM/AM Radio TUNE － Use the TUNE/SEEK SEEK － The SEEK function
The ignition switch must be in the button to tune to a desired searches up and down from the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. frequency. Press the button to current frequency to find a station
Turn the system on by pushing the tune to a higher frequency, and the with a strong signal. To activate it,
FM/AM button. Adjust the volume button to tune to a lower press and hold the or side of
by turning the VOL/SELECT knob. frequency. the TUNE/SEEK button until you
The band and frequency that the hear a beep, then release it.
You can also operate the tune
radio was last tuned to are displayed. function by using the VOL/SELECT SCAN － The scan function samples
To change bands, press the FM/AM knob. all stations with strong signals on the
button. On the FM band, ST will be Press the VOL/ SELECT knob and selected band. To activate it, press
displayed if the station is you will see ‘‘ SEL ’’ in the display. the SCAN button, then release it.
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo Turn the knob right to tune to a You will see SCAN in the display.
reproduction in AM is not available. higher frequency, or left to tune to a The system will scan for a station
To Select a Station lower frequency. with a strong signal. When it finds
You can use any of five methods to To turn it off, press the VOL/ one, it will stop and play that station
find radio stations on the selected SELECT knob or button, or for about 10 seconds.
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset ٕPLAY button. If you do nothing, the system will
buttons, and auto select. The system will return to the normal then scan for the next strong station
display about 10 seconds after you and play it for 10 seconds. When it
stop adjusting the tune mode. plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
116 2009 Fit

PRESET － Each preset button (1－ AUTO SELECT － If you are You will see a ‘‘ 0 ’’ displayed after
6) can store one frequency on AM, traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto select
and two frequencies on FM. longer receive your preset stations, cannot find a strong station for that
1. Select the desired band, AM or you can use the auto select feature to preset button.
find stations in the local area.
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store If you do not like the stations auto
two frequencies with each preset Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘ A. SEL ’’ select has stored, you can store other
button. flashes in the display, and the system frequencies on the preset buttons as
goes into scan mode for several previously described.
Features
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
function to tune the radio to a To turn off auto select, press the A.
six AM and twelve FM stations in the
desired station. SEL (auto select) button. This
preset buttons.
restores the presets you originally
3. Pick a preset number (1－6), and
set.
hold it until you hear a beep.
For information on FM/AM radio
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
frequencies and reception, see page
total of six stations on AM and
184.
twelve stations on FM.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 117

Radio Data System (RDS) If the station you are listening to is

On the FM band, you can select a not an RDS station, the display
favorite station and display the continues to show the frequency with
program service name according to the PS name display function on.
the information provided by the radio
When you turn off this function by
data system (RDS).
pressing the TITLE button, the
Program Service (PS) Name Display display shows ‘‘ RDS INFO OFF. ’’
The program service name display
function shows the name of the PROGRAM SERVICE
station you are listening to. With the NAME DISPLAY ON
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off. To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘ RDS INFO ON ’’ message
on the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
118 2009 Fit

Radio Data System (RDS) Category ALL: All RDS category stations Press or ٕPLAY button to
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft select an RDS category. The display
rock music shows the selected RDS category
COUNTRY:Country music name for about 10 seconds. You can
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music use the search or scan function to
TOP 40: Top 40 hits find radio stations in the selected
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies RDS category. If you do nothing
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft while the RDS category name is
Features
rhythm and blues displayed, the selected category is
RELIGION: Religious music and canceled.
RDS CATEGORY religious talk RDS Program Search
CLASSIC: Classical music This function searches up and down
JAZZ: Jazz a frequency for the strongest signal
INFO: News, information, sports, from the frequencies that carry the
On the FM band selected, you can talk, foreign language, personality,
select the program category provided selected RDS category information.
public, college, and weather This can help you to find a station in
by the RDS. Press or ٕPLAY TRAFFIC: Traffic information
button to display and select an RDS your favorite category. To activate it,
category. The principal RDS press the or side of the
categories are shown as follows; TUNE/SEEK button. You will see
the selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When
the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 5 seconds.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 119

If the system does not find a station, RDS Program SCAN You can use the RDS program search
‘‘ NOTHING ’’ will be blinking for The scan function samples all or scan function even if the PS name
about 5 seconds, then the system stations with strong signals on the display function is off. In this case,
goes back to the last selected station. selected RDS category. To activate it, the display shows a frequency in
press the SCAN button. You will see place of a PS name.
‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display. The system
will scan for a station with a strong
signal in the selected RDS category.
You will also see the selected RDS
category name blinking while
searching it. When it finds one, it will
stop and play that station for about 10
seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘ NOTHING ’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
120 2009 Fit

Adjusting the Sound SVC － Adjusts the volume level Audio System Lighting
Press the SOUND ( ) button to based on the vehicle speed. You can use the instrument panel
select an appropriate setting: bass, brightness control knob to adjust the
The system will return to the audio
treble, fader, balance, and SVC illumination of the audio system (see
display about 10 seconds after you
(speed-sensitive volume page 76). The audio system
stop adjusting a mode.
compensation). Turn the VOL/ illuminates when the parking lights
SELECT knob to adjust the setting. Speed-sensitive Volume are on, even if the system is turned
Compensation (SVC) off.
BASS － Adjusts the bass.
Features
The SVC mode controls the volume
TREBLE － Adjusts the treble. based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
FADER － Adjusts the front-to-back becomes. As you slow down, the
strength of the sound. audio volume decreases.
BALANCE － Adjusts the side-to- The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
side strength of the sound. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
Each mode is shown in the display as HIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knob
it changes. Turn the VOL/SELECT to adjust the setting to your liking. If
knob to adjust the setting to your you feel the sound is too loud,
liking. When the level reaches the choose low. If you feel the sound is
center, you will see ‘‘ C ’’ in the too quiet, choose high.
display. This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
2009 Fit 121

Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)
CD BUTTON ꂹ ꂾ BUTTON DISC SLOT
DISC EJECT
( ꁎ ) BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP SEEK/SKIP
(ꀾ (ꀽ
SEEK) SEEK)
BUTTON BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON VOL/SELECT KNOB ꂺPLAY BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON
122 2009 Fit

To Play a Disc The in-dash disc player can also play NOTE: If a file on an MP3 or WMA
To load or play discs, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in disc is protected by digital rights
switch must be in the ACCESSORY CD-TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats. management (DRM), the audio unit
(I) or ON (II) position. When playing a disc in MP3 or displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
WMA, you will see ‘‘ MP3 ’’ or skips to the next file.
You operate the in-dash disc player
‘‘ WMA ’’ in the display. You can see
with the same controls used for the If you have a disc that is a
up to 99 folders, and select up to 999
radio. To select the disc player, press combination of CD-DA tracks and
tracks/files.
the CD button. You will see ‘‘ CD ’’ in MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
Features
the display. The folder or track format to listen by pressing the CD
numbers are shown in the display. button.
You can also select the displayed
Video CDs and DVDs will not work
information with the TITLE button
in this unit.
(see page 123). The system will
continuously play a disc until you A disc compressed in AAC format
change modes. cannot be played in this audio
system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.

The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 123

The specifications of the compatible To Load a Disc You can see the album, artist, and
MP3 file are: Insert a disc about halfway into the track name in the display. If a disc is
Sampling frequency: disc slot. The drive will pull the disc recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 24/ in the rest of the way to play it. You see the folder and file name, and the
22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) operate the disc player with the same artist, album, and track tag.
Bit rate: controls used for the radio. The
number of the current track is shown With the folder name, you will see
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
in the display. When playing a disc in the FOLDER indicator in the display.
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
MP3 or WMA, the numbers of the The TRACK indicator is shown with
(MPEG1),
current folder and file are shown. the file or track name.
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) The system will continuously play a When you press the TITLE button
Compatible with variable bit rate and disc until you change modes. while a disc without text data is
multi-session. You cannot load and play 3-inch (8- playing, you will see ‘‘ NO INFO ’’ on
Maximum layers (including ROOT): cm) discs in this unit. the display.
8 layers
For information on how to handle The display shows up to about 16
The specifications of the compatible and protect compact discs, see page characters of selected text data (the
WMA file are: 186. folder name, file name, etc.).
Sampling frequency: Text Data Display Function If the text data has more than 16
32/44.1/48 kHz Each time you press the TITLE characters, you will see the first 15
Bit rate: button, the display shows you the characters and the indicator on the
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps text data on a disc, if the disc was display. Press and hold the TITLE
Compatible with variable bit rate and recorded with text data. button until the next 16 characters
multi-session. are shown. You can see up to about
Maximum layers (including ROOT): 31 characters of the text data.
8 layers
124 2009 Fit

If you press and hold the TITLE When you turn on the audio system SEEK/SKIP － Each time you press
button again, the display shows the next time, the system keeps your the button, the player skips
first 15 characters again. selection with the TITLE button. forward to the beginning of the next
If any letter is not available, it is To Change or Select Tracks/Files track (files in MP3/WMA mode).
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the You can use the SEEK/SKIP button Press the button to skip
display. When the disc has no text while a disc is playing to select backward to the beginning of the
data, you will see ‘‘ NO INFO ’’ on passages and change tracks (files in current track. Press it again to skip to
the display. MP3/WMA mode). the beginning of the previous track.
Features
You will also see some text data In MP3/WMA mode, use the To move rapidly within a track, press
under these conditions: or ٕPLAY button to select folders in and hold the or button.
the disc, and use the SEEK/SKIP You can also operate the track
● When a new folder, file, or track is button to change files.
selected. selection by using the VOL/SELECT
knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob
● When you change the audio mode and you will see ‘‘ SEL ’’ in the
to play a disc with text data or in display. Turn the knob to switch the
MP3 or WMA. track number. Press the VOL/
● When you insert a disc, and the SELECT knob or ٕPLAY button to
system begins to play. set your selection. To turn it off,
press the buttton.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display.With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 125

In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode In MP3/WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION － To select FOLDER-REPEAT － This feature, FOLDER-RANDOM － This
a different folder, press the or when activated, replays all the files feature, when activated, plays the
ٕPLAY button. Press the on the selected folder in the order files in the current folder in random
button to skip to the next folder, and they are compressed in MP3/WMA. order, rather than in the order they
the ٕPLAY button to skip to the To activate folder repeat mode, press are compressed in MP3/WMA. To
previous folder. the RPT button repeatedly until you activate folder random play, press the
see ‘‘ F-RPT ’’ in the display. The RDM button. You will see ‘‘ F-RDM ’’
You can also operate the folder and system continuously replays the in the display. The system will then
file selection by using the VOL/ current folder. Press and hold the select and play files randomly. This
SELECT knob. Press the VOL/ RPT button to turn it off. continues until you deactivate folder
SELECT knob and you will see random play by pressing and holding
‘‘ SEL ’’ in the display. Turn the knob Each time you press the RPT button,
the RDM button.
to switch the folder number and the mode changes from file repeat to
press the knob to set your selection. folder repeat, then to normal playing. Each time you press the RDM
Turn the knob to switch the file button, the mode changes from
RANDOM (Random within a disc)
number and press the knob to your folder random play, to within a disc
－ This feature plays the tracks
selection. To turn it off, press the random play, then to normal play.
within a disc in random order. In
button repeatedly. MP3/WMA mode, all files in all
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE REPEAT) folders are played in random order.
－ To continuously replay a track To activate random mode, press the
(file in MP3/WMA mode), press the RDM button repeatedly until you see
RPT button. You will see ‘‘ RPT ’’ in ‘‘ RDM ’’ in the display. Press and
the display. Press and hold the RPT hold the RDM button to turn it off.
button to turn it off.
126 2009 Fit

SCAN － The scan function samples In MP3/WMA mode To Stop Playing a Disc
all the tracks on the disc in the order Press the eject button ( ) to
FOLDER-SCAN － This feature,
they are recorded on the disc (all remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
when activated, samples the first file
files in the selected folder in MP3 or but do not remove it from the slot,
in each folder on the disc in the
WMA mode). To activate the scan the system will automatically reload
order they are recorded. To activate
feature, press the SCAN button. You it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
the folder scan feature, press the
will see ‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display. You mode. To begin playing, press the
SCAN button repeatedly. You will
will get a 10 second sampling of each CD button.
see ‘‘ F-SCAN ’’ in the display. The
Features
track/file in the disc/folder. Press
system will then play the first file in Press the FM/AM button to switch
and hold the SCAN button to get out
the main folders for about 10 to the radio while a disc is playing.
of scan mode and play the last track
seconds. If you do nothing, the Press the CD button to play the disc.
sampled.
system will then play the following
If you turn the system off while a disc
first files for 10 seconds each. When
is playing, either with the power ( )
the system samples the first file of all
button or by turning off the ignition
folders, F-SCAN is cancelled, and the
switch, the disc will stay in the drive.
system plays normally.
When you turn the system back on,
Each time you press the SCAN the disc will begin playing where it
button, the mode changes from left off.
track/file scan to folder scan, then to
Protecting Discs
normal playing.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
186 .
2009 Fit 127

Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the

Error
error messages you may see in the Cause Solution
Message
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the Will disappear when the temperature returns to
HEAT ERROR High Temperature
display while playing a disc, press normal.
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or UNSUPPORTED
Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next supported
deformation. If there is no damage, supported track or file plays automatically.
insert the disc again. For the
additional information on damaged BAD DISC Mechanical Error Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
discs, see page 187. PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
OWNERS deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
MANUAL PUSH (see page 187). Insert the disc again. If the code
The audio system will try to play the EJECT does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
disc. If there is still a problem, the removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force
error message will reappear. Press the disc out of the player.
BAD DISC Servo Error
the eject button, and pull out the PLEASE CHECK
disc. OWNERS
MANUAL
Insert a different disc. If the new disc
plays, there is a problem with the BAD DISC DISC Error Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
first disc. If the error message cycle PLEASE CHECK deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
repeats and you cannot clear it, take OWNERS (see page 187).
MANUAL
your vehicle to a dealer.
128 2009 Fit

Playing an iPod® (Models without navigation system)
On Sport model USB INDICATOR iPod INDICATOR ꂹ ꂾ BUTTON AUX BUTTON
Features
RANDOM
BUTTON
ꀾ ꀽ
SEEK SEEK
(SKIP －) (SKIP ＋)
BUTTON BUTTON
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 129

To Play an iPodꭂ Model Firmwareꭧ ● Do not use an extension cable

This audio system can operate the iPod 5G Ver. 1.2 or more between the USB adapter cable
audio files on the iPodꭂ with the iPod classic Ver. 1.0 or more equipped with your vehicle and
same controls used for the in-dash iPod nano Ver. 1.2 or more your dock connector.
disc player. To play an iPod, connect iPod nano 2nd Ver. 1.1.2 or more
generation
● We recommend backing up your
it to the USB adapter cable in the
iPod nano 3rd Ver. 1.0 or more data before playing it.
upper glove box by using your dock
generation
connector, then press the AUX In AAC format, DRM (digital rights
iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or more
button. The ignition switch must be management) files cannot be played.
iPhone Ver. 1.1.1 or more If the system finds a DRM file, the
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be ꭧ : Use the latest firmware. audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,
recharged with the ignition switch in and then skips to the next file.
these positions. Use only compatible iPods with the
latest firmware. iPods that are not
The audio system reads and plays compatible will not work in this audio
sound files to be playable on the unit.
iPod. The system cannot operate an
iPod as a mass storage device. The NOTE:
system will only play songs stored on ●
Do not connect your iPod using a
the iPod with iTunes. HUB.
iPod and iTunes are registered ● Do not keep the iPod in the
trademarks owned by Apple Inc. vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
iPods that are compatible with your heat will damage it.
audio system are listed below.
130 2009 Fit

Connecting an iPod DOCK CONNECTOR Sample Display

USB CONNECTOR
Features
OK to disconnect.
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE 2. Connect your dock connector to When the iPod is connected and the
the iPod correctly and securely. iPod mode is selected on the audio
1. Open the upper glove box, and pull display, the USB and iPod indicators
out the USB adapter cable. 3. Install the dock connector to the
are shown in the display. After
USB connector securely.
loading, you will see Honda markꭧ
on the iPod. That means you can
only operate your iPod using the
vehicle’s audio unit.
ꭧ : It may take a few minutes for the
Honda mark to display on the iPod. If
the display does not change, this
function is not supported on your
iPod model or firmware.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 131

If the audio system still does not Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files
recognize the iPod, the iPod may Each time you press the TITLE Use the SKIP button while an iPod is
need to be reset. Follow the button the display mode switches playing to select passages and
instructions that came with your between the album name, the song change files.
iPod, or you can find reset name, the artist name, or name off
(which turns off the text display). SKIP － Each time you press the
instructions online at www.apple.com/
ipod.
(SKIP +) button, the system skips
The display shows up to about 16 forward to the beginning of the next
characters of the selected data. If the file. Press the (SKIP －) button,
text data has more than 16 to skip backward to the beginning of
characters, you will see the first 15 the current file. Press it again to skip
characters and the indicator in the to the beginning of the previous file.
display. Press and hold the TITLE
button until the next 16 characters To move rapidly within a file, press
are shown. and hold either side ( or ) of
the SKIP button.
132 2009 Fit

The display shows items on the To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

selected list. Turn the VOL/SELECT You can select any type of repeat and
knob to select an item, then press the shuffle mode by using the RPT
VOL/SELECT knob to set your button or the RDM button.
selection. REPEAT － This feature
Press the VOL/
SELECT knob. If you select ‘‘ ALL, ’’ all available files continuously plays a file. To activate
on the selected list are played. the repeat feature, press the RPT
button. You will see ‘‘ RPT ’’ in the
Features
Pressing the button goes back display. To turn it off, press the RPT
to the previous display and pressing button again.
the TITLE button cancels this setting
mode. SHUFFLE ALL － This feature
You can also select a file from any list plays all available files in a selected
on the iPod menu: playlists, artists, list (playlists, artists, albums or
albums and songs, by using the songs) in random order. To activate
VOL/SELECT knob. Push the VOL/ the shuffle all feature, press the RDM
SELECT knob to switch the display button. You will see ‘‘ RDM ’’ in the
to an iPod menu, then turn the VOL/ display. To turn it off, press and hold
SELECT knob to select a desired list. the RDM button.
Press the VOL/SELECT knob to set
your selection.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 133

SHUFFLE ALBUM － This feature To Stop Playing Your iPod When you disconnect the iPod while
plays all available albums in a To play the radio when an iPod is it is playing, the display shows ‘‘ USB
selected list (playlists, artists, albums playing, press the FM/AM button. If NO DATA. ’’
or songs) in random order. The files a disc is in the audio unit, press the iPod Error Messages
in each album are played in the CD button to play the disc.
If you see an error message in the
recorded order. To activate the Disconnecting an iPod display, see page 135 .
shuffle album feature, press the You can disconnect the iPod at any
RDM button repeatedly. You will see time when you see ‘‘ OK to
‘‘ F-RDM ’’ in the display. To turn it Disconnect ’’ messageꭧ in the iPod
off, press and hold the RDM button. display. Always make sure you see
Each time you press the RDM ‘‘ OK to Disconnect ’’ message in the
button, the mode changes from iPod display before you disconnect it.
shuffle all play to shuffle album play, Make sure to follow the iPod’s
then to normal playing. instructions on how to disconnect the
dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
ꭧ : The displayed message may vary
on models or versions. On some
models, there is no message to
disconnect.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
134 2009 Fit

iPod® Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the

Error
audio display while playing an iPod, Solution
Message
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your UNPLAYABLE The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There is a
FILE possibility that the files have been damaged.
dealer.
UNSUPPORTED
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
VER.
Features
2009 Fit 135
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
On Sport model USB INDICATOR ꂹ ꂾ BUTTON AUX BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
ꀾ ꀽ
SEEK SEEK
(SKIP －) (SKIP ＋)
BUTTON BUTTON
136 2009 Fit

To Play a USB Flash Memory The recommended USB flash ● We recommend backing up your
Device memory devices are 256 Mbyte or data before playing a USB flash
This audio system can operate the higher. Some digital audio players memory device.
audio files on a USB flash memory may be compatible as well. ● Depending on the type and
device with the same controls used
Some USB flash memory device number of files, it may take some
for the in-dash disc player. To play a
(such as devices with security time before they begin to play.
USB flash memory device, connect it
lockout features, etc.) will not work
to the USB adapter cable in the ● Depending on the software the
in this audio unit.
Features
upper glove box, then press the AUX files were made with, it may not be
button. The ignition switch must be NOTE: possible to play some files, or
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) display some text data.
● Do not use a device such as a card
position. reader or hard drive as the device The specifications for compatible
The audio system reads and plays or your files may be damaged. MP3 files are:
the audio files on the USB flash ● Do not connect your USB flash – Sampling frequency:
memory device in MP3, WMA or memory device using a HUB. 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
AACꭧ formats. Depending on the 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
format, the display shows MP3, ● Do not use an extension cable to
WMA or AAC when a USB flash the USB adapter cable equipped – Bit rate:
memory device is playing. The USB with your vehicle. 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
flash memory device limit is up to 160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
● Do not keep the USB flash
700 folders or up to 65535 files. (MPEG1)
memory device in the vehicle.
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
ꭧ : Only AAC format files recorded Direct sunlight and high heat will
112/128/144/160/VBR kbps
with iTunes are playable on this damage it.
(MPEG2)
audio unit.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 137

– Supported standards: – Bit rate: Connecting a USB Flash Memory

MPEG1 Audio Layer3 8 － 320 kbps Device
MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3 – Supported standards: USB CONNECTOR
– Partition: Top partition only MPEG4/AAC LC
– Maximum layers: 8 MPEG2/AAC LC
– Partition: Top partition only
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are: – Maximum layers: 8
– Sampling frequency: Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or
32/44.1/48 kHz AAC format, a file with unsupported
– Bit rate: version cannot be played. If the
system finds it, the audio unit
48 － 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then USB ADAPTER CABLE
– Supported standards: skips to the next file.
WMA version 7/8/9 1. Open the upper glove box, and pull
In WMA or AAC format, DRM out the USB adapter cable.
– Partition: Top partition only (digital rights management) files
– Maximum layers: 8 cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
The specifications for compatible UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
AAC files are: to the next file.
– Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
138 2009 Fit

Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files

Each time you press the TITLE Use the SKIP button while a USB
button, the display mode shows you flash memory device is playing to
in sequence, the folder name, the file select passages and change files.
name, the artist name, the album
name, the song name, or name off SKIP － Each time you press the
(which turns off the text display). (SKIP +) button, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
The display shows up to about 16 file. Press the (SKIP －) button,
Features
characters of the selected data. If the to skip backward to the beginning of
text data has more than 16 the current file. Press it again to skip
USB CONNECTOR characters, you will see the first 15 to the beginning of the previous file.
characters and the indicator in the
2. Connect the USB flash memory display. Press and hold the TITLE To move rapidly within a file, press
device to the USB connector button until the next 16 characters and hold either side ( or ) of
correctly and securely. are shown. the SKIP button.
When the USB flash memory device FOLDER SELECTION － To select
is connected, the USB indicator is a different folder, press the
shown in the display. button or ٕPLAY button. Press the
button to skip to the next
folder, and press the ٕPLAY button
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 139

To Select a File from Folder and File To Select Repeat, Random or Scan RANDOM － This feature plays all
Lists Mode: the files in random order. To activate
You can select any type of repeat, the track random feature, press the
random and scan modes by using the RDM button. You will see ‘‘ RDM ’’ in
Folder Selection RPT button or RDM button, or SCAN the display. To turn it off, press and
button. hold the RDM button.
REPEAT － This feature FOLDER RANDOM－ This feature
Press the VOL/ continuously plays a file. To activate plays the files in the selected folder
SELECT knob. the repeat feature, press the RPT
Track Selection in random order. To activate the
button. You will see ‘‘ RPT ’’ in the folder random feature, press the
display. To turn it off, press and hold RDM button repeatedly. You will see
the RPT button. ‘‘ F-RDM ’’ in the display. To turn it
FOLDER REPEAT－ This feature off, press and hold the RDM button.
replays all the files in the selected Each time you press the RDM
You can also select a folder or file by folder in the order they are stored.
using the VOL/SELECT knob. Push button, the mode changes from track
To activate the folder repeat feature, random play to folder random play,
the VOL/SELECT knob to switch the press the RPT button repeatedly. You
display to the folder or file list, then then to normal playing.
will see ‘‘ F-RPT ’’ in the display. To
turn the VOL/SELECT knob to turn it off, press and hold the RPT
select a folder or file. Press the VOL/ button.
SELECT knob to set your selection.
Each time you press the RPT button,
Pressing the button goes back the mode changes from file repeat to
to the previous display and pressing folder repeat, then to normal playing.
the TITLE button cancels this setting
mode.
140 2009 Fit

SCAN － This feature samples all To Stop Playing a USB Flash USB Flash Memory Device Error
files in the selected folder in the Memory Device Messages
order they are stored. To activate the To play the radio when a USB flash If you see an error message in the
scan feature, press the SCAN button. memory device is playing, press the display, see page 142 .
You will see ‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display. FM/AM button. If a disc is in the
You will get a 10 second sampling of audio unit, press the CD button to
each file in the folder. Press and hold play the disc.
the SCAN button to get out of the Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Features
scan mode and play the last file Device
sampled. You can disconnect the USB flash
FOLDER SCAN－ This feature memory device in any time even if
samples the first file in each folder in the USB mode is selected on the
the order they are stored. To activate audio system. Always follow the USB
the folder scan feature, press the flash memory device’s instructions
SCAN button repeatedly. You will when you remove it.
see ‘‘ F-SCAN ’’ in the display. You When you disconnect the USB flash
will get a 10 second sampling of each memory device while it is playing,
first file in the folder(s). Press and the display shows
hold the SCAN button to get out of ‘‘ USB NO DATA. ’’
the folder scan mode and play the
last file sampled. If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
Each time you press the SCAN begin playing where it left off.
button, the mode changes from file
scan to folder scan, then to normal
playing.
2009 Fit 141

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

Error
audio display while playing a USB Solution
Message
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message, UNPLAYABLE The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory
FILE device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
take your vehicle to your dealer.
UNSUPPORTED Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
142 2009 Fit

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
POWER/VOLUME KNOB FM1 ICON AM ICON SOUND ICON

FM2 ICON AUTO SELECT ICON BACK GROUND ICON
Features
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 143

Voice Control System You can also operate the audio To Select a Station
In addition to the standard audio system without using the control You can use any of five methods to
controls, the audio system in your icons on the audio screen. Use the find radio stations on the selected
vehicle can be operated using the control buttons on the left side of the band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
voice control system. See the screen. The status bar appears on the buttons, and auto select.
navigation section in your quick start bottom of the screen each time you
TUNE － Use the TUNE bar to tune
guide for an overview of this system, operate any of the control buttons.
the radio to a desired frequency.
and the navigation system manual for On the navigation screen, you can
complete details. also see audio information by Press the ً side of the bar to tune to
touching the AUDIO INFO icon on a higher frequency, and press the ٕ
To Play the AM/FM Radio side to tune to a lower frequency.
The ignition switch must be in the the lower of the screen.
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The band and frequency that the Press and hold the ً or ٕ side of
Turn the system on by pushing the radio was last turned to are the TUNE bar until you hear two
power/volume knob or the AM/FM displayed. To change bands, press beeps to change the frequency
button. Adjust the volume by turning the AM/FM button, or touch the rapidly. Release the bar when the
the power/volume knob. desired band icon (FM1, FM2, or display reaches the desired
AM). On the FM band, STEREO will frequency.
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system. be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
144 2009 Fit

SEEK － The SEEK function If you do nothing, the system will Each preset button's frequency is
searches up and down from the then scan for the next strong station shown on the bottom of the audio
current frequency to find a station and play it for 10 seconds. When it display.
with a strong signal. To activate it, plays a station you want to listen to,
press and hold the ً or ٕ side of press the SCAN button again.
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep, Preset － Each preset button can
then release it. store one frequency on AM and two
SCAN － The SCAN function frequencies on FM.
Features
samples all stations with strong 1. Select the desired band, AM or
signals on the selected band. To FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
activate it, press the SCAN button, two frequencies with each preset
then release it. You will see SCAN in button.
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal. When 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
it finds one, it will stop and play that function to tune the radio to a
station for about 10 seconds. desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 145

AUTO SELECT － If you are You will see a ‘‘ 0 ’’ displayed after Adjusting the Sound
traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto select
longer receive your preset stations, cannot find a strong station for every
you can use the auto select feature to preset button.
find stations in the local area.
If you do not like the stations auto
Press the AUDIO button to view the select has stored, you can store other
audio control icons, then touch the frequencies on the preset buttons as
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO previously described.
SEL flashing in the display, and the
To turn off auto select, touch the
system goes into scan mode for
AUTO SEL icon . This restores the
several seconds. It stores the
presets you originally set.
frequencies of six AM, and twelve SOUND ICON
FM stations in the preset buttons. For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page You can adjust the sound on the
184. navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUND icon on the display.
146 2009 Fit

FADER － Adjusts the front-to-back This function is set to MID as the

SPEAKER SETTING strength of the sound. To adjust the default setting when the vehicle
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR leaves the factory. If you feel the
icon. sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose
BALANCE － Adjusts the side-to-
Hi.
side strength of the sound.
To adjust the left/right balance, You can also select the icon with the
touch the L or R icon. joystick. Move it up and down to
Features
move the highlighting and scroll
The right upper display shows you
through lists. Select the icon, then
BASS/TREBLE SETTING the current setting of the sound
enter the joystick.
strength coming from each speaker.
BASS － Adjusts the bass. SVC (speed-sensitive volume
The system will return to the audio
display about 10 seconds after you
TREBLE － Adjusts the treble. To compensation) － The SVC mode
stop adjusting a mode.
adjust the treble and bass, touch controls the volume based on vehicle
or on each side of the treble or speed. The faster you go, the louder
bass adjustment bar. The adjustment the audio volume becomes. As you
bar on the right lower display shows slow down, the audio volume
you the current setting. decreases. Touch the appropriate
icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
mode.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 147

Screen Mode Audio System Lighting

You can select the background You can use the instrument panel
screen to display the sound level. brightness control knob to adjust the
There are three screen modes: level illumination of the control panel (see
(the sound level is shown with the page 76). The audio system
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the illuminates when the parking lights
sound level appears as ripples of are on, even if the radio is turned off.
water), and off. Each time you touch
the background icon, the display
changes.
148 2009 Fit

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
CD ICON
POWER/VOLUME JOYSTICK
KNOB
Features
OPEN BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
RANDOM FAST FORWARD SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP ꭚ BUTTON
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 149

To Play a Disc If you have a disc that is a – Maximum layers

(In-dash single player) combination of CD-DA tracks and (including ROOT): 8 layers
You operate the in-dash disc player MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing and The specifications for compatible
with the same controls used for the
holding CD/AUX button until you WMA files are:
radio. To load or play discs, the
ignition switch must be in the hear a beep. – Sampling frequency:
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Video CDs and DVD discs do not 32/44.1/48 kHz
work in this unit. – Bit rate:
A disc compressed in AAC format 32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192
cannot be played in this audio system. kbps
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the The specifications for compatible – Compatible with variable bit rate
disc to jam in the unit. MP3 files are: and multi-session
– Sampling frequency: – Maximum layers
This audio system can also play 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) (including ROOT): 8 layers
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) NOTE:
MP3 or WMA formats. When playing – Bit rate: If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘ MP3 ’’ protected by digital rights
on the screen. In WMA format, 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps management (DRM), the audio unit
‘‘ WMA ’’ will appear on the screen. displays FILE ERROR, and then
You can select up to 255 folders and (MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ skips to the next file.
play up to 999 tracks. If the disc has a
complex structure, it takes a while to 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
read the disc before the system – Compatible with variable bit rate
begins to play it. and multi-session
150 2009 Fit

To Load a Disc DISC SLOT CLOSE BUTTON
Features
OPEN BUTTON Insert a disc about halfway into the To return the screen to the upright
The in-dash disc player is behind the disc slot. The drive will pull the disc position, press the CLOSE button on
navigation screen. To use the disc in the rest of the way and begin to the edge of the screen panel. Do not
player, press the OPEN button play it. use the folded screen as a tray. If you
beside the screen. The screen folds put a cup, for example, on the screen,
You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-
back, and the disc slot appears. the liquid inside the cup may spill on
cm) discs in this system.
the screen when you go over a bump.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 151

Press the AUDIO button beside the To Change or Select Tracks/Files You can also select an icon with the
screen to show the audio display and joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
operate the in-dash disc player. PRESET BUTTON'S FUNCTION down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press the
You can also operate the audio
ENT on the top of the joystick to
system without using the control
select the icon.
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD/AUX button. The status bar SKIP － Each time you press
appears on the bottom of the screen. (preset 6), the player skips forward
On the navigation screen, you can to the beginning of the next track
see the audio information whenever (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press
you touch the AUDIO INFO or (preset 5), to skip backward to
TRACK LIST icons on the lower of the beginning of the current track.
PRESET BUTTONS
the screen. Press it again to skip to the
You can use the preset buttons while beginning of the previous track.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, the track, album, and artist a disc is playing to select passages FF/REW － To move rapidly within
name are shown on the audio and change tracks (files in MP3 or a track/file, press and hold
display. When playing a disc in MP3 WMA mode). Each preset button's (preset 4) or (preset 3).
or WMA, the folder number and function is shown on the bottom of
name, the file number and name, the the screen.
artist name, and the elapsed time are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, it will not be displayed.
152 2009 Fit

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION － To select FOLDER REPEAT － This feature, FOLDER RANDOM － This
a different folder, press either side of when activated, replays all files on feature, when activated, plays all files
the TUNE bar to move to the the selected folder in the order they in the selected folder in random
beginning of the next folder. Press are compressed. To activate folder order, rather than in the order they
the ً side of the TUNE bar to skip repeat, press and hold the RPT are compressed. To activate folder
to the next folder, and the ٕ side to button (preset 1) for 2 seconds. You random, press and hold the RDM
move to the beginning of the current will see ‘‘ FOLDER REPEAT ’’ in the button. You will see ‘‘ FOLDER
Features
folder. Press it again to skip to the display. The system continuously RANDOM ’’ in the display. The
beginning of the previous folder. replays the current folder. Press the system then selects and plays files
RPT button again to turn it off. randomly. This continues until you
TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT) Selecting a different folder with the deactivate folder random by pressing
－ To continuously replay a track TUNE bar also turns off folder the RDM button again, or if you
(file in MP3 or WMA mode), press repeat. select a different folder with the
the RPT button (preset 1). You will TUNE bar.
see ‘‘ TRACK REPEAT ’’ in the TRACK RANDOM (Random
display. Press the RPT button again within a disc/folder) － This
to turn it off. feature plays the tracks/files within a
disc in random order. To activate
track random, press the RDM button
(preset 2). You will see ‘‘ TRACK
RANDOM ’’ in the display. Press the
RDM button again to return to
normal play.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 153

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) － In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track List

The scan function samples all tracks
FOLDER SCAN － This feature,
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON
when activated, samples all the first
they were recorded. To activate scan,
files in each folder on the disc in
press the SCAN button. You will see
order. To activate folder scan, press
‘‘ TRACK SCAN ’’ in the display. You
and hold the SCAN button for 2
will get a 10 second sampling of each
seconds. You will see ‘‘ FOLDER
track/file on the disc. Press the
SCAN ’’ in the display.
SCAN button to get out of scan mode
and play the last track/file sampled. The system plays the first file in each
folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
nothing, the system then plays the
5 or 6) also turns off scan. FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON
first file in each folder for 10 seconds
each. After playing the first file of the
last folder, the system goes to normal You can also select a track/file
playing. directly from a track list on the audio
display. Press the AUDIO button to
Pressing either SKIP button (preset show the audio display, then touch
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder the Track List icon. The track list
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the menu appears on the display.
SCAN button, also turns off folder
scan.
154 2009 Fit

When playing a CD recorded with Select the desired track/file by To Stop Playing a Disc
text data, each track name is shown touching the icon on the display. The To play the radio when a disc is
on the audio display. With a disc selected icon will be highlighted in playing, press the AM/FM button or
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder blue. The system begins to play the touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If
number and the location are also selected track/file. With a disc in a PC card is in the audio unit, touch
displayed. MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon the CARD icon to play the PC card.
on the upper left of the screen to Press the CD/AUX button again or
If the disc was not recorded with text
move to the root folder. The current touch the CD icon to switch back to
data, only the track number is
Features
folder is highlighted in blue. the in-dash disc player.
shown.
If you turn the system off while a disc
To scroll through the display, touch
is playing, either with the power/
the ً or ٕ icon on the side of the volume knob or by turning off the
screen. To go back to the previous ignition switch, the disc will stay in
display, touch the Return icon on the the drive. When you turn the system
screen. back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 155

Removing a Disc Protecting Discs

To remove a disc from the audio unit, For information on how to handle
fold back the screen by pressing the and protect discs, see page 186.
OPEN button (see page 150). Press
the disc eject button ( ) to remove
the disc. If you eject the disc, but do
not remove it from the slot, the
system will automatically reload it
after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD/AUX button.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You cannot close the screen if a disc
is partially inserted into its slot.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
156 2009 Fit

Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the Error

display while playing a disc, find the Cause Solution
Message
cause in the chart to the right. If you Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
cannot clear the error message, take CHECK DISC FOCUS Error Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc player.
your vehicle to your dealer. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
The chart on the right explains the Check the disc for damage or deformation.
error messages you may see in the MECH ERROR Mechanical Error If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
display while playing a disc.
Features
ejected, see your dealer.
If you see an error message in the CHECK DISC Disc Format Error Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
display while playing a disc, press Check the disc for damage or deformation.
the eject button. After ejecting the HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the
disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new disc
plays, there is a problem with the
first disc. If the error message cycle
repeats and you cannot clear it, take
your vehicle to a dealer.
2009 Fit 157

Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)
POWER/VOLUME KNOB PC CARD ICON

TRACK LIST ICON
JOYSTICK
OPEN BUTTON
PLAY MODE
ICON
CD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON FAST FORWARD BUTTON SKIP ꬽ BUTTON
158 2009 Fit

To Play a PC card Always use the recommended ● Never insert foreign objects into
You operate the PC card player with memory card with the appropriate the PC card slot.
the same controls used for the radio adapter (if an adapter is needed).
and the in-dash disc player. To load Some memory cards will not work in
MP3 files are:
or play a card, the ignition switch this unit.
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or – Sampling frequency:
NOTE: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
ON (II) position.
●
When you insert a PC card into the 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
The PC card player reads and plays
Features
slot, make sure you put it in – Bit rate:
cards in MP3 or WMA formats.
straight. If you cannot insert it,
Depending on the format, the screen 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
remove it, and insert again.
will indicate ‘‘ MP3 ’’ or ‘‘ WMA ’’ 160/192/224/256/320 kbps
when a card is playing. The card limit ● Do not keep PC cards in the (MPEG1)
of the player is 255 folders and 999 vehicle. Direct sunlight and high 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
tracks. If the card has a complex heat will damage them. 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
structure, it takes some time for the ● To avoid damaging the card – Compatible with variable bit rate
system to begin playing it. reader, do not insert hard disc and multi-session
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2, drive cards into the PC card slot. – Maximum layers
the recommended PC cards for the ● You cannot close the screen (move (including ROOT): 8 layers
PC card reader are: it to the upright position) until the
CompactFlash PC card is inserted all the way into
Flash ATA its slot or removed.
SD memory card
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 159

The specifications for compatible Loading a PC Card Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
WMA files are: The drive will read the PC card and
PC CARD SLOT begin to play it.
– Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz Return the screen to the upright
– Bit rate: position by pressing the CLOSE
button on the edge of the screen
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
panel.
– Compatible with variable bit rate
Press the AUDIO button beside the
and multi-session
screen to show the audio display and
– Maximum layers operate the PC card player.
(including ROOT): 8 layers
You can also operate the audio
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights system without using the control
management) files cannot be played. The PC card slot is behind the icons on the audio screen. Press any
If the system finds a DRM file, it navigation screen. To use the PC of the appropriate control buttons.
skips that file and plays the next card player, press the OPEN button The status bar appears on the bottom
available folder or file. beside the screen. The screen folds of the screen. On the navigation
back, and the PC card slot appears. screen, you can see the audio
information whenever you touch the
AUDIO INFO icon on the screen.
160 2009 Fit

There are three play modes: Folder, To Select a Play Mode

Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the PLAY MODE ICON
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in FOLDER MODE
blue.
●
Folder mode plays tracks in the MODE INDICATOR
order they were added to the card.
Features
● Artist mode plays tracks in
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
● Album mode plays albums
PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON
(folders) in alphabetical order.
ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE
If play mode information was not
included in the tracks/files when
they were added to the card, it will
not be displayed on the screen.
MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 161

PLAY MODE ICON
To select a play mode, push the Select the desired mode by touching After you select the play mode, the
AUDIO button to show the audio the appropriate icon, or move the display changes to the selectable
display, then touch the PLAY MODE joystick, then press the ENT. playing menu. If you select
icon on the display. ‘‘ Continue playing the
current song, ’’ the system goes into
the selected play mode after playing
the current file.
162 2009 Fit

If you select ‘‘ Play a new track list, ’’ To Change or Select Tracks/Files Icons on the screen can also be
the system goes into the selected selected with the joystick. Move the
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
play mode immediately and begins to joystick left or right and up or down
play the new track list. until the icon is highlighted, then
press the ENT on the top of the
To go back to the previous screen,
joystick to select the icon.
press the CANCEL button on the
right side of the screen. To exit the
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
Features
button.
PRESET BUTTONS
You can use the preset buttons while
a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button's function is
shown on the bottom of the screen.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 163

SKIP － Each time you press TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT) TRACK RANDOM (Random
(preset 6), the player skips forward － To continuously replay a file, within a folder) － This feature
to the beginning of the next file. press the RPT button (preset 1). You plays the files within a folder in
Press (preset 5), to skip will see ‘‘ TRACK REPEAT ’’ in the random order. To activate random
backward to the beginning of the display. Press the RPT button again play, press the RDM button (preset
current file. Press it again to skip to to turn it off. 2). You will see ‘‘ TRACK
the beginning of the previous file. RANDOM ’’ in the display. Press the
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
RDM button again to return to
FF/REW － To move rapidly within REPEAT － This feature, when
normal play.
a file, press and hold (preset 4) activated, replays all the files on the
or (preset 3). selected folder/artist/album in the FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
order they are recorded or listed. To RANDOM － This feature, when
FOLDER SELECTION － To select
activate each repeat mode, press and activated, plays all files in each
a different folder, press either side of
hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2 folder/artist/album in random order,
the TUNE bar to move the beginning
seconds. You will see ‘‘ FOLDER rather than in the order they are
of the next folder. Press the ً side REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or recorded or listed. To activate each
of the TUNE bar to skip the next ALBUM REPEAT ’’ in the display. random play, push and hold the
folder, and to the ٕ side to move the The system continuously replays the RDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds.
beginning of the current folder. current folder/artist/album. Press You will see ‘‘ FOLDER RANDOM,
Press it again to skip to the and hold the RPT button again to ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUM
beginning of the previous folder. turn it off. Pressing the RDM button, RANDOM ’’ in the display.
or selecting a different folder/artist/
album with the TUNE bar also turns
off the repeat feature.
164 2009 Fit

The system then selects and plays FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM SCAN Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
files randomly. This continues until － This feature, when activated, (preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
you deactivate each random play by samples the first file in each folder/ folder/artist/album with the TUNE
pressing the RDM button again. artist/album on the PC card in order. bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
To activate each scan feature, press also turns off the scan feature.
SCAN － The SCAN function
and hold the SCAN button. You will
samples all the files on the PC card in
see ‘‘ FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST
the order they are recorded. To
SCAN or ALBUM SCAN ’’ in the
activate the scan feature, press the
Features
display.
SCAN button. You will see ‘‘ TRACK
SCAN ’’ in the display. You will get a The system plays the first file in the
10 second sampling of each file on folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
the PC card. Press the SCAN button nothing, the system plays the first
again to get out of scan mode and file in each folder, in order, for 10
play the last file sampled. seconds each. After playing the first
file of the last folder/artist/album,
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
the system returns to normal play.
(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 165

Using a Track List

FOLDER ICON ARTIST NAME
RETURN ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
To scroll through the display, touch In artist mode, the artist name is also
the ً or ٕ icon on the side of the displayed on the right side of each
You can also select a file directly
screen. To go back to the previous selectable icon. Select the desired
from a track list on the audio display.
display, touch the Return icon. file.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track To play a file, touch its icon on the
List icon. The track list menu screen. In folder mode, touch the
appears on the display. folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the root folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
166 2009 Fit

Song Search Function

ALBUM NAME TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
SONG SEARCH ICON
Features
ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON
RETURN ICON
In album mode, the album name is Folder mode is shown. You can then select any of three
also displayed on the right side of modes to search a file: Title by
When you select ‘‘ Song Search ’’
each selectable icon. Select the keyword, Artist, and Album.
from the track list display, the song
desired file.
search menu appears.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 167

Searching for a Song Title by keyword FILE LIST Searching for a Song by Artist Name
MORE ICON ARTIST LIST
DELETE ICON LIST ICON After the system searches for a song,
a file list is displayed. To scroll
In Title by keyword mode, enter the Select the Artist icon, and the artist
title name, or any keyword, by through the list, touch the ً or ٕ list appears. Select the desired artist,
touching the letter icons on the icon on the side of the screen. Select and the artist's file list is displayed.
screen. Press the List icon to begin the desired file by touching the
the song search. If you press the appropriate icon, or moving the
CANCEL button on the control joystick and pressing the ENT.
panel, the display returns to the
mode menu without doing a search.
To cancel the selected letter, touch
the Delete icon. To select more
characters, touch the More icon. The
other character list will be shown.
168 2009 Fit

Searching for a Song by Album Name To Stop Playing a PC card Removing a PC Card
To play the radio when a PC card is To remove a PC card from the audio
ALBUM LIST playing, press the AM/FM button or unit, fold back the screen by
touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If pressing the OPEN button (see page
a disc is in the audio unit, press the 150). Press the eject button ( ) to
CD/AUX button or touch the CD remove the card. If you do not
icon to play the disc. Touch the remove it from the slot, you cannot
CARD icon to switch back to the PC return the screen to the upright
Features
card player. position.
If you turn the system off while a PC To return the screen to the upright
card is playing, either with the position, press the CLOSE button.
power/volume knob or by turning off You can also eject a card when the
the ignition switch, the card will stay ignition switch is off.
Select the Album icon, and the album in the drive. When you turn the
list appears. Select the desired system back on, the card will begin PC Card Player Malfunction
album, and its song list is displayed. playing where it left off. If there is a problem with the PC card
You can then select the desired song player, see your dealer.
When you leave the vehicle, always
from the list. remove the PC card from the audio
unit.
2009 Fit 169

Playing an iPod® (Models with navigation system)
POWER/VOLUME KNOB USB ICON

iPod INDICATOR
JOYSTICK
CD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON SKIP ꬽ BUTTON
170 2009 Fit

To Play an iPodꭂ Voice Control System NOTE:

This audio system can operate the You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
● Do not connect your iPod using a
audio files on the iPodꭂ with the HUB.
same controls used for the in-dash control buttons, but cannot operate
disc player. To play an iPod, connect the play mode functions. ● Do not keep the iPod in the
it to the USB adapter cable in the iPods that are compatible with your vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
upper glove box by using your dock audio system are listed below. heat will damage it.
connector, then press the CD/AUX Do not use an extension cable
Features
Model Firmwareꭧ ●
button. The ignition switch must be between the USB adapter cable
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) iPod 5G Ver. 1.2 or more
iPod classic Ver. 1.0 or more equipped with your vehicle and
position. The iPod will also be your dock connector.
recharged with the ignition switch in iPod nano Ver. 1.2 or more
these positions. iPod nano 2nd Ver. 1.1.2 or more ● We recommend backing up your
generation
data before playing it.
The audio system reads and plays iPod nano 3rd Ver. 1.0 or more
sound files to be playable on the generation In AAC format, DRM (digital rights
iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or more management) files cannot be played.
iPod as a mass storage device. The iPhone Ver. 1.1.1 or more If the system finds a DRM file, the
system will only play songs stored on ꭧ : Use the latest firmware. audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,
the iPod with iTunes. and then skips to the next file.
Use only compatible iPods with the
iPod and iTunes are registered latest firmware. iPods that are not
trademarks owned by Apple Inc. compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 171

Connecting an iPod DOCK CONNECTOR Sample Display

USB CONNECTOR
OK to disconnect.
USB CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE 2. Connect your dock connector to When the iPod is connected and the
the iPod correctly and securely. iPod mode is selected on the audio
1. Open the upper glove box, and pull display, the iPod indicator is shown
out the USB adapter cable. 3. Install the dock connector to the
on the screen. After loading, you will
USB connector securely.
see Honda markꭧ on the iPod. That
means you can only operate your
iPod using the vehicle’s audio unit.
ꭧ : It may take a few minutes for the
Honda mark to display on the iPod. If
the display does not change, this
function is not supported on your
iPod model or firmware.
172 2009 Fit

If the audio system still does not To Select a File from iPod Menu
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
ipod.
The current file number and total of
Features
the selected playable files are
displayed on the screen. It also
shows the artist, album and track
(file) names on the screen.
Select the desired mode by touching
To Change or Select Files the appropriate icon, or move the
Use the SKIP button while an iPod is You can also select a file from any on
joystick, then press the ENT.
playing to select passages and the iPod menu: playlists, artists,
change files. albums and songs. Press the AUDIO If you select ‘‘ ALL ’’ on either the
button to display the screen, then artists or albums list, all available
SKIP － Each time you press the touch the iPod MENU icon. files on the selected list are played.
SKIP + button (Preset 6), the system
skips forward to the beginning of the Press the AUDIO button to go back
next file. Press the SKIP － button to the normal audio playing display.
(Preset 5), to skip backward to the Pressing the CANCEL button goes
beginning of the current file. Press it back to the previous screen, and
again to skip to the beginning of the pressing the MAP button cancels the
previous file. audio control display on the screen.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 173

Using a Track List REPEAT － This feature

continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button (Preset 1). You will see
‘‘ REPEAT ’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press the RPT button (Preset 1)
again.
TRACK RANDOM－ This feature
plays all available files from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
RETURN ICON (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in
random order. To activate the track
TRACK LIST ICON To scroll through the display, touch random feature, press the RDM
You can also select a file directly the ً or ٕ icon on the side of the button (Preset 2). You will see
from a track list on the audio display. screen. To go back to the previous ‘‘ TRACK RANDOM ’’ in the display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the display, touch the Return icon. To turn it off, press the RDM button
audio display, then touch the Track To play a file, touch its icon on the (Preset 2).
List icon. The track list menu screen. The current folder is
appears on the display. highlighted in blue.
To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
You can select any type of repeat and
random mode by using the RPT
button or RDM button.
174 2009 Fit

ALBUM RANDOM－ This feature To Stop Playing Your iPod ꭧ : The displayed message may vary
plays all available albums from the To play the radio when an iPod is on models or versions. On some
selected items in the iPod menu list playing, press the FM/AM button or models, there is no message to
(playlists, artists, albums or songs) in touch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. If disconnect.
random order. The files in each a disc is in the audio unit, press the
When you disconnect the iPod while
album are played in the recored CD/AUX button or touch the CD
it is playing, the navigation screen
order. To activate the album random icon to play the disc. If a PC card is in
shows ‘‘ NO DATA. ’’
feature, press and hold the RDM the audio unit, Press the CD/AUX
Features
button (Preset 2). You will see button or touch the CARD icon to If you reconnect the same iPod, the
‘‘ ALBUM RANDOM ’’ in the display. play a PC card. system may begin playing where it
To turn it off, press and hold the left off, depending on what mode the
Press the CD/AUX button again or
RDM button (Preset 2). iPod is in when it is reconnected.
touch the AUX icon to switch back to
You can also select another list from the iPod. iPod Error Messages
the iPod menu while keeping the Disconnecting an iPod If you see an error message on the
random function. You can disconnect the iPod at any screen, see page 176 .
NOTE: time when you see ‘‘ OK to
Disconnect ’’ messageꭧ in the iPod
Available operating function varies display. Always make sure you see
on models or versions. Some ‘‘ OK to Disconnect ’’ message in the
functions may not be available on the iPod display before you disconnect it.
vehicle’s audio system. Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect the
dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
2009 Fit 175

iPod® Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Error
screen while playing an iPod, find the Solution
Message
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer. UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
NO SONG Information of music is nothing.
176 2009 Fit

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
POWER/VOLUME KNOB USB ICON

WMA/MP3 INDICATOR
JOYSTICK
Features
CD/AUX BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE FOLDER
BAR
REPEAT BUTTON SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON SKIP ꬽ BUTTON
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 177

To Play a USB Flash Memory The recommended USB flash ● We recommend backing up your
Device memory devices are 256 Mbyte or data before playing a USB flash
This audio system can operate the higher. Some digital audio players memory device.
audio files on a USB flash memory may be compatible as well. ● Depending on the type and
device with the same controls used
Some USB flash memory device number of files, it may take some
for the in-dash disc player. To play a
(such as devices with security time before they begin to play.
USB flash memory device, connect it
lockout features, etc.) will not work
to the USB adapter cable in the ● Depending on the software the
in this audio unit.
upper glove box, then press the CD/ files were made with, it may not be
AUX button. The ignition switch NOTE: possible to play some files, or
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or display some text data.
● Do not use a device such as a card
ON (II) position. reader or hard drive as the device Voice Control System
The audio system reads and plays or your files may be damaged. You can select the AUX mode by
the audio files on the USB flash using the navigation system voice
● Do not connect your USB flash control buttons, but cannot operate
memory device in MP3, WMA or memory device using a HUB.
AACꭧ formats. Depending on the the play mode functions.
format, the display shows MP3, ● Do not use an extension cable to The specifications for compatible
WMA or AAC when a USB flash the USB adapter cable equipped MP3 files are:
memory device is playing. The USB with your vehicle.
flash memory device limit is up to – Sampling frequency:
● Do not keep the USB flash 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
700 folders or up to 65535 files. memory device in the vehicle. 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
ꭧ : Only AAC format files recorded Direct sunlight and high heat will
with iTunes are playable on this damage it.
audio unit.
178 2009 Fit

– Bit rate: – Partition: In WMA or AAC format, DRM

32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ Top partition only (digital rights management) files
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps – Maximum layers: 8 cannot be played. If the system finds
(MPEG1) a DRM file, the audio unit displays
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ The specifications for compatible UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
112/128/144/160/VBR kbps AAC files are: to the next file.
(MPEG2) – Sampling frequency: Connecting a USB Flash Memory
– Supported standards: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ Device
Features
MPEG1 Audio Layer3 44.1/48 kHz USB CONNECTOR
MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3 – Bit rate:
– Partition: 8 － 320 kbps
Top partition only – Supported standards:
– Maximum layers: 8 MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
WMA files are: – Partition:
– Sampling frequency: Top partition only
32/44.1/48 kHz – Maximum layers: 8
– Bit rate: USB ADAPTER CABLE
Even if recorded in MP3, WMA or
48 － 320/VBR kbps (Max 384) AAC format, a file with unsupported 1. Open the upper glove box, and pull
– Supported standards: version cannot be played. If the out the USB adapter cable.
system finds it, the audio unit
WMA version 7/8/9
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 179

To Change or Select Files Using a Track List

Use the SKIP button while a USB
flash memory device is playing to
select passages and change files.
SKIP － Each time you press the
SKIP + button (Preset 6), the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press the SKIP － button
(Preset 5), to skip backward to the
beginning of the current file. Press it
USB CONNECTOR again to skip to the beginning of the
previous file.
2. Connect the USB flash memory TRACK LIST ICON
device to the USB connector FOLDER SELECTION － To select
a different folder, press either side of You can also select a file directly
correctly and securely.
the TUNE FOLDER bar. Press the from a track list on the audio display.
When the USB flash memory device ً side to skip to the next folder, and Press the AUDIO button to show the
is connected and the USB mode is press the ٕ side to skip to the audio display, then touch the Track
selected on the audio system, the beginning of the previous folder. List icon. The track list menu
WMA or MP3 indicator is shown on appears on the display.
the navigation screen. It also shows
the folder and file numbers, and the
elapsed time on the screen.
180 2009 Fit

FOLDER ICON TRACK REPEAT － This feature FOLDER RANDOM－ This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate plays the files in the selected folder
the track repeat feature, press the in random order. To activate the
RPT button (Preset 1). You will see folder random feature, press and
‘‘ TRACK REPEAT ’’ in the display. hold the RDM button (Preset 2). You
To turn it off, press the RPT button will see ‘‘ FOLDER RANDOM ’’ in
(Preset 1). the display. To turn it off, press and
hold the RDM button (Preset 2).
FOLDER REPEAT－ This feature
Features
replays all the files in the selected TRACK SCAN － This feature
folder in the order they are stored. samples all files in the selected folder
RETURN ICON To activate the folder repeat feature, in the order they are stored. To
press and hold the RPT button activate the scan feature, press the
To scroll through the display, touch (Preset 1). You will see ‘‘ FOLDER SCAN button. You will see ‘‘ TRACK
the ً or ٕ icon on the side of the REPEAT ’’ in the display. To turn it SCAN ’’ in the display. You will also
screen. To go back to the previous off, press and hold the RPT button see the file number blinking. You will
display, touch the Return icon. (Preset 1). get a 10 second sampling of each file
To play a file, touch its icon on the in the folder. Press the SCAN button
TRACK RANDOM － This feature
screen. The current folder is to get out of the scan mode. The
plays all the files in random order. To
highlighted in blue. system plays the last file sampled.
activate the track random feature,
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan press the RDM button (Preset 2).
Mode: You will see ‘‘ TRACK RANDOM ’’ in
You can select any type of repeat, the display. To turn it off, press the
random and scan modes by using the RDM button (Preset 2).
RPT button or RDM button, or SCAN
button.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 181

FOLDER SCAN－ This feature To Stop Playing a USB Flash Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
samples the first file in each folder in Memory Device Device
the order they are stored. To activate To play the radio when a USB flash You can disconnect the USB flash
the folder scan feature, press and memory device is playing, press the memory device in any time even if
hold the SCAN button. You will see FM/AM button or touch the FM1, the USB mode is selected on the
‘‘ FOLDER SCAN ’’ in the display. FM2, or AM icon. If a disc is in the audio system. Always follow the USB
You will also see the folder number audio unit, press the CD/AUX button flash memory device’s instructions
blinking. You will get a 10 second or touch the CD icon to play the disc. when you remove it.
sampling of each first file in the If a PC card is in the audio unit, press When you disconnect the USB flash
folder(s). Press the SCAN button to the CD/AUX button or touch the memory device while it is playing,
get out of the scan mode. The system CARD icon to play a PC card. the navigation screen shows ‘‘ NO
plays the last file sampled. DATA. ’’
Press the CD/AUX button again or
touch the AUX icon to switch back to If you reconnect the same USB flash
the USB flash memory device. memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
screen, see page 183 .
182 2009 Fit

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Error
screen while playing a USB flash Solution
Message
memory device, find the solution in
the chart to the right. If you cannot
clear the error message, take your UNPLAYABLE The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory
FILE device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
vehicle to your dealer.
UNSUPPORTED Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
Features
NO SONG Information of music is nothing.
2009 Fit 183

FM/AM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these as the distance from the station's
frequencies: transmitter, nearby large objects, and
atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station's signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are
transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Driving very near the transmitter of a
listening to an FM station, you will
Stations must use these exact see the stereo indicator flickering off station that is broadcasting on a
frequencies. It is fairly common for and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
stations to round-off the frequency in Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
their advertising, so your radio could go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio's reception. You
display a frequency of 100.9 even completely as you get out of range of may temporarily hear both stations,
though the announcer may identify the station's signal. or hear only the station you are close
the station as ‘‘ FM101. ’’ to.
184 2009 Fit

FM/AM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing

vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station's transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
2009 Fit 185

Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

●When using CD-R or CD-RW When a disc is not being played,
discs, use only high quality discs store it in its case to protect it from
labeled for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
● When recording a CD-R or
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
system. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
● Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the A new disc may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
● Handle your discs properly to
can flake off and fall on the recording touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping.
surface of the disc, causing skipping stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
or other problems. Remove these These, along with contamination
pieces by rubbing the inner and from finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip
outer edges with the side of a pencil pens, can cause the disc to not play
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit. Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
186 2009 Fit

Additional Information of 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Features
Examples of these discs are shown to
the right: Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped
Cracked Burrs
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 187

4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs ● Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
● Audio unit may not play the
● CD-R or CD-RW may not play due following formats.
to the recording conditions.
● Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape Arrow Shape
188 2009 Fit

Remote Audio Controls
MODE BUTTON The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a disc, iPod or USB
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top flash memory device, the system
or bottom of the button and hold it skips to the beginning of the next
until the desired volume is reached, track (file in MP3, WMA or AAC
then release it. format) each time you press the top
(＋) of the CH button. Press the
The MODE button changes the
bottom (－) to return to the
mode. Pressing the button
beginning of the current track/file.
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
Features
Press it twice to return to the
disc or a PC card (if a disc or a PC
previous track/file.
card is loaded), or an audio unit
CH BUTTON VOL BUTTON connected to the auxiliary input jack You will see the track/file number
or the USB adapter cable. and the elapsed time. If the disc has
On vehicles with navigation system text data or is compressed in MP3 or
Three controls for the audio system If you are listening to the radio, use
WMA, you can also see any other
are mounted in the steering wheel the CH button to change stations.
information (track title, file name,
hub. These let you control basic Each time you press the top (＋) of
folder name, etc.).
functions without removing your the button, the system goes to the
hand from the wheel. next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(－) to go back to the previous
station. If you press and hold the CH
button (＋) or (－), the system goes
into the seek mode. It finds a station
with a strong signal.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 189

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use Auxiliary Input Jack

the skip function to select folders.
Press and hold the top (＋) of the CH
button until you hear a beep, to skip
forward to the first file of the next
folder. Press the bottom (－) to skip
backward to the previous folder.
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top (＋) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom (－) to go back to the On vehicles without navigation system
previous file.
On vehicles with navigation system
Your vehicle has the auxiliary input
jack on the front panel. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the CD/
AUX (On vehicles with navigation
system) or AUX (On vehicles without
navigation system) button to select it.
190 2009 Fit

Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle's audio system will If your vehicle's battery is

disable itself if it is disconnected disconnected or goes dead, or the
from electrical power for any reason. radio fuse is removed, the audio
To make it work again, you must system will disable itself. If this
enter a specific digit code using the happens, you will see ‘‘ ENTER
preset buttons. Because there are CODE ’’ in the frequency display the
hundreds of number combinations next time you turn on the system.
possible from specific digits, making Use the preset buttons to enter the
Features
the system work without knowing code. On vehicles with navigation
the exact code is nearly impossible. system, touch the Done icon to set
the code. The code is on the radio
You should have received a card that
code card included in your owner's
lists your audio system's code and
manual kit. When it is entered
serial numbers. It is best to store this
correctly, the radio will start playing.
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio If you make a mistake entering the
system's serial number in this code, do not start over; complete the
owner's manual. sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have 10 tries to enter the
If you lose the card, you must obtain
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
the code number from a dealer. To
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
do this, you will need the system's
the system on for 1 hour before
serial number.
trying again.
2009 Fit 191

Setting the Clock
On vehicles without navigation system 1 (H) BUTTON 3 (R) BUTTON

Press and hold the FM/AM
(CLOCK) button until the displayed
time begins to blink, then release the CLOCK
button. Change the hours by
pressing the 1 (H) button until the
numbers advance to the desired
time. Change the minutes by
pressing the 2 (M) button until the FM/AM (CLOCK)
numbers advance to the desired BUTTON
time.
Press the FM/AM (CLOCK) button
again to enter the set time.
2 (M) BUTTON
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is For example: On vehicles with navigation system
before the half hour, press the FM/ 1:06 will reset to 1:00 The navigation system receives
AM (CLOCK) button until you hear a 1:53 will reset to 2:00 signals from the global positioning
beep, then press the 3 (R) button to system (GPS), and the displayed
set the clock back to the previous time is updated automatically by the
hour. If the displayed time is after the GPS. Refer to the navigation system
half hour, the clock sets forward to manual for how to adjust the time.
the beginning of the next hour.
192 2009 Fit

Security System
On Sport model The security system will not set if the

The security system helps to protect hood, tailgate, or any door is not fully
your vehicle and valuables from closed. If the system will not set,
theft. The horn sounds and a check the door and tailgate open
combination of headlights, parking/ indicator on the instrument panel
side marker lights and taillights (see page 62) to see if the doors and
flashes if someone attempts to break tailgate are fully closed. Since it is
into your vehicle or remove the audio not part of the monitor display,
Features
unit. This alarm continues for 2 manually check the hood.
minutes, then the system resets. To
NOTE: To see if the system is set
reset an activated system before the
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR after you exit the vehicle, press the
2 minutes have elapsed, unlock the
LOCK button on the remote
driver's door with the key or the Once the security system is set, transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
remote transmitter. opening any door, the tailgate, or the system is set, the horn will beep
The security system automatically hood without using the key or the once.
sets 15 seconds after you lock the remote transmitter, will cause it to
alarm. It also alarms if the radio is Do not attempt to alter this system or
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
removed from the dashboard or the add other devices to it.
system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the tailgate from the wiring is cut.
outside with the key, driver's lock The alarm will also be activated if a
tab, door lock master switch, or passenger inside the locked vehicle
remote transmitter. The security turns the ignition switch on.
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
2009 Fit 193

Cruise Control
On Sport model and Canadian LX model Using the Cruise Control 3. Press the SET/DECEL button on
Cruise control allows you to maintain the steering wheel. The CRUISE
CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) BUTTON CONTROL indicator on the
without keeping your foot on the instrument panel comes on to
accelerator pedal. It should be used show the system is now activated.
for cruising on straight, open
Cruise control may not hold the set
highways. It is not recommended for
speed when you are going up and
city driving, winding roads, slippery
down hills. If your speed increases
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
SET/DECEL BUTTON CANCEL press the RES/ACCEL button. The
Improper use of the cruise BUTTON
indicator on the instrument panel will
control can lead to a crash. 1. Press the CRUISE button on the come back on.
steering wheel. The CRUISE When climbing a steep hill, the
Use the cruise control only MAIN indicator on the instrument
when traveling on open automatic transmission may
panel comes on. downshift to hold the set speed.
highways in good weather.
NOTE: The main switch can be left
on, even when the system is not in
use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
194 2009 Fit

Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with the cruise control turned
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: on, you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: ● Press and hold the SET/DECEL pedal to speed up for passing. After
● Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when completing the pass, take your foot
button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed. off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
desired cruising speed, release the will return to the set cruising speed.
●
To slow down in very small
button. Resting your foot on the brake or
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
clutch pedal causes the cruise
Features
●
To increase your speed in very button. Each time you do this,
small amounts, tap the RES/ your vehicle will slow down about control to cancel.
ACCEL button. Each time you do 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
this, the vehicle will speed up ● Tap the brake or clutch pedal
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
lightly with your foot. The CRUISE
● Push on the accelerator pedal. CONTROL indicator on the
Accelerate to the desired cruising instrument panel goes out. When
speed, then press the SET/ the vehicle slows to the desired
DECEL button. speed, press the SET/DECEL
button.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 195

Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control Tapping either of the paddle shifters Resuming the Set Speed
shifts the gear up or down, but does When you push the CANCEL button,
CRUISE BUTTON
not cancel the cruise control. For or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
more information on driving with system will remember the previously
paddle shifters, see page 224. set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press the RES/
ACCEL button. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator comes on. The
vehicle will accelerate to the same
cruising speed as before.
CANCEL BUTTON
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
You can cancel cruise control in any previous cruising speed.
of these ways:
● Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
● Press the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
● Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
196 2009 Fit

Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period ........................... 198

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation ................ 198
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures ......... 199
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling................................. 199
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The Hood ................................... 200
information in this section will help Oil Check ................................ 201
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check ............ 202
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ............................. 203
Before Driving
read the information in this section Accessories and
first. Modifications .......................... 206
Carrying Cargo ........................... 208
2009 Fit 197

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Some gasoline today is blended with

Help assure your vehicle's future Your vehicle is designed to operate oxygenates such as ethanol or
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use of operate on oxygenated gasoline
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). a lower octane gasoline can cause a containing up to 10% ethanol by
During this period: persistent, heavy metallic rapping volume and up to 15% MTBE by
noise that can lead to engine damage. volume. Do not use gasoline
●
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
containing methanol.
acceleration. We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent If you notice any undesirable
● Avoid hard braking for the first 200
additives that help prevent fuel operating symptoms, try another
miles (300 km).
system and engine deposits. service station or switch to another
● Do not change the oil until the brand of gasoline.
scheduled maintenance time. In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and For further important fuel-related
You should also follow these emissions control, we strongly information, please refer to your
recommendations with an recommend, in areas where it is Quick Start Guide.
overhauled or exchanged engine, or available, the use of gasoline that
when the brakes are replaced. does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact your
authorized dealer for service.
198 2009 Fit

Service Station Procedures
Refueling HOLDER 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel

1. Park with the driver's side closest nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
to the service station pump. not try to ‘‘ top off ’’ the tank. Leave
TETHER some room for the fuel to expand
FUEL FILL DOOR
Pull out with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
Push vehicle's fuel vapor recovery
Before Driving
system. The system helps keep
FUEL FILL CAP fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. pump. If this does not fix the
You may hear a hissing sound as problem, consult your dealer.
pressure inside the tank escapes.
2. Outside of the vehicle, push on the Place the fuel fill cap in the holder
right side edge of the fuel fill door on the fuel fill door. To prevent the
in the middle. The fuel fill door will fuel fill cap from becoming lost, it
pop up slightly. Pull it outward to is attached to the fuel filler with a
open it. tether.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 199

Opening and Closing the Hood

LATCH
Gasoline is highly flammable HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
●
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame
away.
● Handle fuel only outdoors.
● Wipe up spills immediately.
2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on until 1. Park the vehicle, and set the
Slide your hand to the left until
it clicks at least once. If you do not parking brake. Pull the hood
you feel the hood latch handle.
properly tighten the cap, the release handle under the lower left
Push this handle up to release it.
malfunction indicator lamp may corner of the dashboard. The hood
Lift up the hood.
come on (see page 304). You will will pop up slightly.
also see a ‘‘ CHECK FUEL CAP ’’ If the hood latch handle moves
message on the information stiffly, or if you can open the hood
display. without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until lubricated.
it latches.
200 2009 Fit

SUPPORT ROD Oil Check

DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
Before Driving
LOWER MARK
GRIP CLIP
3. Holding the grip, pull the support 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
rod out of its clip. Insert the end check the level. It should be
Wait a few minutes after turning the between the upper and lower
into the designated hole in the engine off before you check the oil.
hood. marks.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). If it is near or below the lower mark,
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean see Adding Engine Oil on page 253.
hole. Put the support rod back into cloth or paper towel.
its holding clip. Lower the hood to 3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
about a foot (30 cm) above the into its hole.
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
2009 Fit 201

Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owner's Maintenance

Checks on page 250 for information
RESERVE TANK about checking other items on your
vehicle.
MAX
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 256 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
202 2009 Fit

Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number. City MPG Highway MPG
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Combined Fuel Estimated Annual
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates Economy Fuel Cost
shown in the example to the right are (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
a useful tool for comparison when
buying a vehicle. EPA estimates Combined Fuel Economy － Estimated Annual Fuel Cost －
include: Represents a combination of city and Provides an estimated annual fuel
City MPG － Represents urban highway driving. The scale cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A represents the range of combined km) per year multiplied by the cost
range of miles per gallon achieved is fuel economy for other vehicles in per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
also provided. the class. data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
Highway MPG － Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate For more information on fuel
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, economy ratings and factors that
typical of longer trips in free-flowing affect fuel economy, visit www.
traffic. A range of miles per gallon fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
achieved is also provided. vehicles.gc.ca)
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 203

Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Improving Fuel Economy ● Keep your vehicle clean － In
The following factors can lower your Vehicle Maintenance particular, a build-up of snow or
vehicle's fuel economy: A properly maintained vehicle mud on your vehicle's underside
● Aggressive driving (hard maximizes fuel economy. Poor adds weight and rolling resistance.
maintenance can significantly reduce Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
acceleration and braking)
fuel economy. Always maintain your economy.
●
Excessive idling, accelerating and vehicle according to the maintenance Drive Efficiently
braking in stop-and-go traffic messages displayed on the ● Drive moderately － Rapid
●
Cold engine operation (engines information display (see Owner's acceleration, abrupt cornering, and
are more efficient when warmed Maintenance Checks on page 250). hard braking increase fuel
up) For example: consumption.
● Driving with a heavy load or the air ● Use the recommended viscosity ● Observe the speed limit －
conditioner running motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
Certification Seal (see page on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
● Improperly inflated tires 253). mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
● Maintain proper tire inflation － speed and you reduce the drag.
An under-inflated tire increases Trailers, car top carriers, roof
‘‘ rolling resistance, ’’ which racks and bike racks are also big
reduces fuel economy. contributors to increased drag.
● Avoid carrying excess weight in
● Always drive in the highest gear
your vehicle － It puts a heavier possible － If your vehicle has a
load on the engine, increasing fuel manual transmission, you can
consumption. boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
204 2009 Fit

Fuel Economy
● Avoid excessive idling － Idling Checking Your Fuel Economy

results in 0 miles per gallon.
● Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system － The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use Miles Gallons Miles per
driven of fuel Gallon
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
● Plan and combine trips －
Before Driving
L per
Combine several short trips into 100 Liter Kilometers 100 km
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
recommended source of information 2) Reset trip counter to zero.
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
2009 Fit 205

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can ● Make sure the accessory does not
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
modifications or add any accessories, with proper vehicle operation or
be sure to read the following vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a performance.
information.
crash in which you can be hurt ●
Be sure electronic accessories do
Accessories or killed. not overload electrical circuits (see
Your dealer has Honda accessories
page 307) or interfere with proper
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this operation of your vehicle.
vehicle. These accessories have been owner's manual regarding
designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. ● Before installing any electronic
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular If possible, have your dealer
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and inspect the final installation.
meet factory specifications, and could low-powered audio systems should
adversely affect your vehicle's not interfere with your vehicle's
● Do not install accessories on the
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such side pillars or across the rear
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and windows. Accessories installed in
tire pressure monitoring system (if these areas may interfere with
equipped). proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
206 2009 Fit

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle ● Non-Honda wheels, because they

Removing parts from your vehicle, or are a universal design, can cause
replacing components with non- excessive stress on suspension
Honda components could seriously components and will not be
affect your vehicle's handling, compatible with the tire pressure
stability, and reliability. monitoring system (TPMS)ꭧ.
Here are some examples: ꭧ : If equipped
●
Lowering your vehicle with a non- ●
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
Honda suspension kit that can interfere with the operation of
Before Driving
significantly reduces ground your vehicle's anti-lock brakes and
clearance can allow the other systems.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps ● Modifying your steering wheel or
or other raised objects, which
any other part of your vehicle's
could cause the airbags to deploy.
safety features can make the
● Raising your vehicle with a non- systems ineffective.
Honda suspension kit can affect
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
the handling and stability.
consult your dealer.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 207

Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

storage areas:
CARGO AREA ● Upper glove box
REAR SIDE POCKET FRONT DOOR POCKETS UPPER GLOVE BOX
● Lower glove box
(RIGHT SIDE) ● Front door pockets
● Seat-back pocket (if equipped)
●
Center pocket
● Cargo area side pocket
● Cargo area, including the rear
seats when folded up or down.
● Seat under box
● Cargo floor box (all canadian
models with automatic
transmission)
However, carrying too much cargo,
CARGO FLOOR BOX*2 SEAT UNDER BOX CENTER POCKET or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle's handling, stability,
stopping distance, tires, and make it
SEAT-BACK POCKET*1 LOWER GLOVE BOX
unsafe. Before carrying any type of
ꭧ1: If equipped cargo, be sure to read the following
ꭧ2: All Canadian models with automatic transmission pages.
208 2009 Fit

Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (Payload) Label Example Steps for Determining Correct Load
The maximum load for your vehicle Limit －
is 850 lbs (385 kg).
(1) Locate the statement ‘‘ The
See Tire And Loading Information combined weight of occupants and
label attached to the driver's cargo should never exceed XXX kg
doorjamb. or XXX lbs. ’’ on your vehicle's
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight
This figure includes the total weight of the driver and passengers that will
Before Driving
of all occupants, cargo, and be riding in your vehicle.
accessories, and the tongue load if (3) Subtract the combined weight of
you are towing a trailer. the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other

loading guidelines in this
manual.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 209

Carrying Cargo
(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, Example 1
if the ‘‘ XXX ’’ amount equals 1,400 Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. (150 lbs ꭦ 2 ＝ 300 lbs) (550 lbs)
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 － 750 (5 ꭦ 150) ＝ 650 lbs.) Example 2
(5) Determine the combined weight Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs ꭦ 4 ＝ 600 lbs) (250 lbs)
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Example 3
Step 4. Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs ꭦ 5 ＝ 750 lbs) (100 lbs)
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be In addition, the total weight of the
transferred to your vehicle. Consult vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
this manual to determine how this cargo, and trailer tongue load must
reduces the available cargo and not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on
a label on the driver's doorjamb.
210 2009 Fit

Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger ● If you fold the rear seats up or Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
Compartment down, tie down items that could be ● Distribute cargo evenly on the
● Store or secure all items that could thrown about the vehicle during a floor of the cargo area, placing the
be thrown around and hurt crash or sudden stop. Also, keep heaviest items on the bottom and
someone during a crash. all cargo below the bottom of the as far forward as possible. Tie
windows. If it is higher, it could down items that could be thrown
● Be sure items placed on the floor
interfere with the proper operation about the vehicle during a crash or
behind the front seats cannot roll
of the side curtain airbags. sudden stop.
under the seats and interfere with
the driver's ability to operate the ● Do not stack items higher than the
Before Driving
pedals, the proper operation of the back of the rear seats. They can
seats, or proper operation of the block your view and be thrown
sensors under the seats. around the vehicle during a crash.
● Keep the upper and lower glove ● If you carry large items that
boxes closed while driving. If it is prevent you from closing the
open, a passenger could injure tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
their knees during a crash or passenger area. To avoid the
sudden stop. possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 53.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 211

Carrying Cargo
Cargo Hooks
HOOKꭧ
ꭧ: If equipped HOOK Your vehicle also has cargo hooks on

side panel in the cargo area.
The two or four hooks on the floor
They are designed to hold light
can be used to install a net for
items. Heavy objects may damage
securing items.
the hook. Make sure any items put
on each hook weigh less than 2.2 lbs
(1 kg).
212 2009 Fit

Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ...................... 214

starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ...................... 215
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine ..................... 216
manual and automatic transmissions. Manual Transmission ................. 217
It also includes important information Automatic Transmission ............. 219
on parking your vehicle, the braking Driving with the Paddle Shifters
system, the vehicle stability assist (Sport only) ............................. 224
(VSA®), and the tire pressure Parking ....................................... 229
monitoring system (TPMS). Braking System .......................... 230
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ............... 231
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®),
Driving
aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System ..................... 233
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ................................... 235
Towing a Trailer.......................... 238
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome ............................. 238
2009 Fit 213

Driving Guidelines
On Sport model
Your vehicle is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your vehicle has a
minimum of ground clearance.
●
Use caution if you ever drive your
vehicle on very rough or rutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘ speed bumps ’’ can
also cause damage.
●
Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.
214 2009 Fit

Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
and adjustments before you drive page 93).
your vehicle.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside mirrors (see page
and outside lights are clean and 101).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
7. Check the steering wheel
or ice.
adjustment (see page 77).
2. Check that the hood is fully
8. Make sure the doors and the
closed.
tailgate are securely closed and
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire locked.
Driving
looks low, use a gauge to check its
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
pressure (see page 273).
your passengers have fastened
4. Check that any items you may be their seat belts (see page 14).
carrying are stored properly or
10. When you start the engine, check
fastened down securely.
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 59).
2009 Fit 215

Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 6. If the engine fails to start, press
pedal, turn the ignition key to the the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all
START (III) position. Do not hold down, and hold it there while
electrical accessories to reduce the
the key in the START (III) position starting to clear flooding. If the
drain on the battery.
for more than 15 seconds at a time. engine still does not start, return to
3. Manual transmission: If the engine does not start right step 5.
Press the clutch pedal down all the away, pause for at least 10 seconds
way. The START (III) position before trying again.
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed. The engine is harder to start in cold
Automatic transmission: weather. Also, the thinner air found at
Make sure the shift lever is in The immobilizer system protects your altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
Park. Press on the brake pedal. vehicle from theft. If an improperly- meters) adds to this problem.
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine's fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page 79.
5. If the engine does not start within

15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
216 2009 Fit

Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift

into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into Rapid slowing or speeding up
reverse with the vehicle moving. can cause loss of control on
Push down the clutch pedal, and slippery surfaces. If you crash,
pause for a few seconds before you can be injured.
shifting into reverse, or shift into one Use extra care when driving on
of the forward gears for a moment. slippery surfaces.
This stops the gears so they won't
‘‘ grind. ’’
When slowing down, you can get
Driving
extra braking from the engine by
The manual transmission is shifting to a lower gear. This extra
synchronized in all forward gears for braking can help you maintain a safe
smooth operation. It has a lockout so speed and prevent your brakes from
you cannot shift directly from fifth to overheating while going down a
reverse. When shifting up or down, steep hill. Before downshifting, make
make sure you push the clutch pedal sure the engine speed will not go
down all the way, shift to the next into the tachometer's red zone in the
gear, and let the pedal up gradually. lower gear.
When you are not shifting, do not
rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
This can cause the clutch to wear out
faster.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 217

Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

Drive in the highest gear that lets the If you exceed the maximum speed
engine run and accelerate smoothly. for the gear you are in, the engine
This will give you good fuel economy speed will enter into the
and effective emissions control. The tachometer's red zone. If this occurs,
following shift points are you may feel the engine cut in and
recommended: out. This is caused by a limiter in the
engine's computer controls. The
Shift up Normal acceleration engine will run normally when you
reduce the rpm below the red zone.
1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
The engine speed limiter only works
2nd to 3rd 27 mph (43 km/h)
when you upshift; engine speed is
3rd to 4th 39 mph (62 km/h)
not limited during downshifts. Before
4th to 5th 53 mph (85 km/h)
downshifting, make sure the engine
will not go into the tachometer's red
zone.
218 2009 Fit

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

SHIFT LEVER
All models except U.S. Sport RELEASE
Driving
BUTTON
U.S. Sport model If the malfunction indicator lamp U.S. Sport model is shown
comes on along with the ‘‘ D ’’
These indicators on the instrument To shift from Park to any position,
indicator, there is a problem with the
panel show which position the shift press firmly on the brake pedal and
automatic transmission control
lever is in. press the release button on the front
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
The ‘‘ D ’’ indicator comes on for a have the transmission checked by of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
few seconds when you turn the your dealer as soon as possible. You cannot shift out of Park when
ignition switch to the ON (II) the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. If it flashes while driving (in (0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 219

All models except U.S. Sport U.S. Sport model Park (P) － This position
To shift from: Do this: To shift from: Do this:
mechanically locks the transmission.
Use Park whenever you are turning
Press the brake pedal, and Press the brake pedal, and
P to R press the shift lever release P to R press the shift lever release off or starting the engine. To shift out
button. button. of Park, you must press on the brake
R to P R to P Press the shift lever release pedal and have your foot off the
N to R Press the shift lever release N to R button. accelerator pedal. Press the release
D3 to 2 button. D to S button on the front of the shift lever
2 to 1
S to D to move it.
1 to 2 D to N
Move the shift lever.
2 to D3 N to D If you have done all of the above and
D3 to D R to N
D to N Move the shift lever. still cannot move the lever out of
D to D3 Park, see Shift Lock Release on
N to D page 223.
R to N
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
220 2009 Fit

Reverse (R) － Press the brake Drive (D) － Use this position for All models except U.S. Sport
pedal and press the release button on your normal driving. The Second (2) － To shift to second,
the front of the shift lever to shift transmission automatically selects a press the release button on the front
from Park to reverse. To shift from suitable gear (1 through 5) for your of the shift lever. This position locks
reverse to neutral, come to a speed and acceleration. You may the transmission in second gear. It
complete stop, and then shift. Press notice the transmission shifting up at does not downshift to first gear when
the release button before shifting higher engine speeds when the you come to a stop.
into reverse from neutral. engine is cold. This helps the engine
Use second gear:
Neutral (N) － Use neutral if you warm up faster.
● For more power when climbing.
need to restart a stalled engine, or if All models except U.S. Sport
it is necessary to stop briefly with the Drive (D3) － This position is similar ● To increase engine braking when
Driving
engine idling. Shift to the Park to D, except only the first three gears going down steep hills.
position if you need to leave your are selected. Use D3 to provide ● For starting out on a slippery
vehicle for any reason. Press on the engine braking when going down a
surface or in deep snow.
brake pedal when you are moving steep hill. D3 can also keep the
the shift lever from neutral to transmission from cycling between ● To help reduce wheel spin.
another gear. third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 221

All models except U.S. Sport U.S. Sport model Engine Speed Limiter
First (1) － To shift from second to S position (S) － To shift into the S If you exceed the maximum speed
first, press the release button on the position, press the release button on for the gear you are in, the engine
front of the shift lever. This position the front of the shift lever, and move speed will enter into the
locks the transmission in first gear. the lever to S. This position is similar tachometer's red zone. If this occurs,
By upshifting and downshifting to D, except only gears from first to you may feel the engine cut in and
through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can fourth are selected. The S position out. This is caused by a limiter in the
operate the transmission much like a keeps the transmission from cycling engine's computer controls. The
manual transmission without a clutch between fourth and fifth gears in engine will run normally when you
pedal. stop-and-go driving. reduce the rpm below the red zone.
With the shift lever in D or S, you
can also use the paddle shifters to
shift the transmission up or down.
With the paddle shifters, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a clutch
pedal. For more information on
driving with the paddle shifters, see
page 224.
222 2009 Fit

Shift Lock Release COVER RELEASE BUTTON

This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release button
does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch. NOTCH
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the shift SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Driving
lock release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or a 4. Insert the key in the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift lock
metal fingernail file, carefully pry release slot. release slot, then reinstall the
on the notch of the cover to 5. Push down on the key while you cover. Make sure the notch on the
remove it. press the release button on the cover is on the left side. Press the
shift lever and move the shift lever brake pedal, and restart the
out of Park to neutral. engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
2009 Fit 223

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)
Using the Paddle Shifters in D

position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
U.S. models only
When you are driving in D position,
you can shift the transmission up or
down manually with the paddle
shifters.
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

To shift up or down, use the ＋ Each time you pull the ＋ (right)
(right) or － (left) paddle shifter on paddle, the transmission shifts to a
each side of the steering wheel. higher gear. Pull the － (left) paddle
to downshift. You will see the
selected gear number on the
instrument panel.
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the gear position indicator shows you
the selected gear number.
When the transmission returns to
drive mode (D), the displayed gear
number disappears.
224 2009 Fit

Downshifting with the paddle shifter The transmission remains in the

To shift Speed range
allows you to increase the engine selected gear if you do not
from
braking when going down steep or accelerate.
long hills, and provides more power
Each time you pull either paddle 5→ 4 under 112 mph
when climbing uphills. You can
shifter, the transmission shifts one (181 km/h)
upshift the transmission manually to
gear up or down. If you want to shift
reduce the rpm. Driving in the
up or down more than two gears, pull 4→3 under 79 mph (127 km/h)
higher gear helps fuel economy.
the paddle shifter twice, pause, and
The transmission control system then pull it again.
3→2 under 51 mph (82 km/h)
monitors the accelerator pedal use
The automatic transmission will not
and your driving conditions. When
allow you to shift up or down if: 2→1
Driving
you press the accelerator pedal as in under 20 mph (32 km/h)
normal driving, the system judges ● You downshift before the engine
that you are driving at a constant speed falls below the upper limit of
● You upshift before the engine
cruising speed without using the the lower gear. speed rises above the lower limit
paddle shifters. Under these of the higher gear.
If you try to do this, the gear position
conditions, D-paddle shift mode is ● You pull both paddle shifters at the
indicator will flash the number of the
canceled, and the transmission same time.
lower gear several times, then return
automatically returns to drive mode
to a higher gear. The transmission downshifts to first
(D).
Here are the speed ranges for gear and returns to drive mode (D)
downshifting. when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop or the vehicle speed is
about 6 mph (10 km/h).
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 225

When you pull and hold the ＋ Using the Paddle Shift in S GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
(right) paddle shifter, the position (Sequential Shift Mode)
transmission automatically returns to U.S. models only
drive mode (D).
With the shift lever in the S position,
If there is a problem in the you can manually shift up or down
transmission while you are driving with the paddle shifters. The
with the paddle shifters, the D transmission goes into the sequential
indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift shift mode and holds the selected
mode is canceled, and the gear.
transmission returns to drive mode
To enter the sequential shift mode,
(D). ‘‘M’’ INDICATOR
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, move the lever to When you move the shift lever from
the S position, then pull either paddle ‘‘ D ’’ to the ‘‘ S ’’ position and pull
shifter. To return to drive mode (D), either paddle shifter, the gear
move the shift lever to the D position indicator displays ‘‘ M ’’
position. While you are driving in the along with the selected gear number.
sequential shift mode, the
transmission will not automatically To upshift, pull the ＋ (right) paddle
return to drive mode (D). shifter. To downshift, pull the －
(left) paddle shifter.
226 2009 Fit

When you accelerate from a stop, the Downshifting with the paddle shifter If the vehicle speed decreases below
transmission starts in first gear, and allows you to increase the engine the redline of the selected lower gear
you must manually upshift between braking when going down steep or while the indicator is flashing, the
first and fifth gears. Make sure you long hills, and provides more power transmission downshifts, and the
upshift before the engine speed when climbing uphills. You can indicator displays the selected gear.
reaches the tachometer's red zone. upshift the transmission manually to ● You upshift before the engine
reduce the rpm. Driving in the
The transmission remains in the speed rises above the lower limit
higher gear helps fuel economy.
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There of the higher gear.
is no automatic downshift when you The transmission also shifts ● You pull both paddle shifters at the
push the accelerator pedal to the automatically as the vehicle comes to
same time.
floor. a complete stop. It downshifts to first
Driving
gear when the vehicle speed reaches
When you are driving in 4th or 5th
6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
gear, the transmission downshifts to
the lower gear under the following The automatic transmission will not
conditions: allow you to shift up or down if:
● The vehicle slows down to a ● You downshift before the engine
certain speed. speed falls below the upper limit of
the lower gear.
● You press the brake pedal.
If you try to do this, the gear position
indicator will flash the number of the
lower gear several times, then return
to a higher gear.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 227

Here are the speed ranges for Starting in Second Gear

upshifting and downshifting. When you are in sequential shift
mode, and the vehicle is stopped,
To shift Speed range pull the ＋ (right) paddle shifter to
from shift to second gear. You will see
‘‘ M2 ’’ in the display. Starting in
1→2 over 0 mph (0 km/h) second gear helps to reduce
wheelspin in deep snow or on a
2→3 over 6 mph (10 km/h) slippery surface.
3→4 over 21 mph (34 km/h)
4→5 over 27 mph (44 km/h)
To shift Speed range

from
228 2009 Fit

Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips ● If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure the ● Make sure the windows are the front wheels away from the
parking brake is set firmly, or your closed. curb. If your vehicle has a manual
vehicle may roll if it is parked on an transmission, put it in first gear
● Turn off the lights.
incline. and set the parking brake.
● Place any packages, valuables, etc.
If your vehicle has an automatic ● If the vehicle is facing downhill,
in the cargo area or take them with
transmission, set the parking brake turn the front wheels toward the
you.
before you put the transmission in curb. If your vehicle has a manual
Park. This keeps the vehicle from ● Lock the doors and the tailgate. transmission, put it in reverse gear
moving and putting pressure on the and set the parking brake.
On Sport model
parking mechanism in the
Check the indicator on the Make sure the parking brake is
Driving
●
transmission.
instrument panel to verify that the fully released before driving away.
security system is set. Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
● Never park over dry leaves, tall
damage the rear brakes.
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
2009 Fit 229

Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front Check your brakes after driving Brake Pad Wear Indicators
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the If the front brake pads need
wheels are drum. A power assist brakes moderately to see if they feel replacing, you will hear a distinctive,
helps reduce the effort needed on the normal. If not, apply them gently and metallic screeching sound when you
brake pedal. The anti-lock brake frequently until they do. Be extra apply the brake pedal. If you do not
system (ABS) helps you retain cautious and alert in your driving. have the brake pads replaced, they
steering control when braking very will screech all the time. It is normal
Braking System Design
hard. for the brakes to occasionally squeal
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits. or squeak when you apply them.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up Each circuit works diagonally across
heat, and reduces their effectiveness the vehicle (the left-front brake is
and reduces brake pad life. In connected with the right-rear brake,
addition, fuel economy can be etc.). If one circuit should develop a
reduced. It also keeps your brake problem, you will still have braking
lights on all the time, confusing at two wheels.
drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their
effectiveness. Use the engine to
assist the brakes by taking your foot
off the accelerator and downshifting
to a lower gear.
230 2009 Fit

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the wheels from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If the ABS indicator comes on, the
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly anti-lock function of the braking
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry system has shut down. The brakes
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on still work like a conventional system,
the brake pedal very hard before the but without anti-lock. You should
The electronic brake distribution
ABS activates. However, you may have your dealer inspect your vehicle
(EBD) system, which is part of the
feel the ABS activate immediately if as soon as possible.
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
braking distribution according to If the ABS indicator comes on while
vehicle loading. driving, test the brakes as shown on
Driving
You should never pump the brake pedal. page 305.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘ stomp and steer. ’’
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 231

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together, longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking brake is fully ABS does not reduce the time or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the EBD system may also distance it takes to stop the snow, than a vehicle without anti-
be shut down. vehicle. It only helps with the lock.
steering control during braking.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 305. If the brakes feel normal, ABS will not prevent a skid that
drive slowly and have your vehicle results from changing direction
repaired by your dealer as soon as abruptly, such as trying to take a
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking corner too fast or making a sudden
which could cause the rear wheels to lane change. Always drive at a safe
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of speed for the road and weather
control. conditions.
On vehicles with VSA system ABS cannot prevent a loss of
The VSA indicator will come on stability. Always steer moderately
along with the ABS indicator. when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
232 2009 Fit

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
If equipped VSA Off Indicator If the indicator does not come on

when the ignition switch is turned to
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
When VSA is off, the VSA off the ON (II) position, there may be a
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
indicator comes on as a reminder. problem with the VSA system. Have
during cornering if the vehicle turns
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
more or less than desired. It also
Vehicle Stability Assist soon as possible.
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or (VSA) System Indicator If the low tire pressure indicator or
slippery road surfaces. It does this by When VSA activates, you will see the TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
regulating the engine's output and by VSA system indicator blink. system automatically turns on even if
selectively applying the brakes. the VSA system is turned off by
If this indicator comes on while pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
When VSA activates, you may notice driving, pull to the side of the road
Driving
page 234). If this happens, you
that the engine does not respond to when it is safe, and turn off the cannot turn the VSA system off by
the accelerator in the same way it engine. Reset the system by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
does at other times. There may also restarting the engine. If the VSA
be some noise from the VSA system indicator stays on or comes Without VSA, your vehicle will have
hydraulic system. You will also see back on while driving, have the VSA normal braking and cornering ability,
the VSA system indicator blink. system inspected by your dealer. but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
The VSA system cannot enhance the NOTE: The main function of the VSA
vehicle's driving stability in all system is generally known as
situations and does not control your Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
vehicle's entire braking system. It is The system also includes a traction
still your responsibility to drive and control function.
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 233

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA Off Switch VSA is turned on every time you start VSA and Tire Sizes
the engine, even if you turned it off Driving with varying tire or wheel
VSA OFF SWITCH
the last time you drove the vehicle. sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
In certain unusual conditions when
make sure they are the same size
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
and type as your original tires (see
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
page 277).
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system If you install winter tires, make sure
is off, the traction control system is they are the same size as those that
also off. You should only attempt to were originally supplied with your
free your vehicle with the VSA off if vehicle. Exercise the same caution
you are not able to free it when the during winter driving as you would if
VSA is on. your vehicle was not equipped with
This switch is under the driver's side VSA.
Immediately after freeing your
beverage holder. To turn the VSA vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
system on and off, press and hold it again. We do not recommend driving
until you hear a beep. your vehicle with the VSA and
When VSA is off, the VSA off traction control systems switched off.
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
234 2009 Fit

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models only Low Tire Pressure If you cannot make the low tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Indicator pressure indicator go out after
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) When the low tire pressure indicator inflating the tires to the specified
that turns on every time you start the is on, one or more of your tires is values, have your dealer check the
engine and monitors the pressure in significantly underinflated. You system as soon as possible.
your tires while driving. should stop and check your tires as Driving on a significantly under-
Each tire has its own pressure sensor soon as possible, and inflate them to inflated tire causes the tire to
(not including the spare tire). If the the proper pressure as indicated on overheat and can lead to tire failure.
air pressure of a tire becomes the vehicle's tire information placard. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
significantly low, the sensor in that If you think you can safely drive a efficiency and tire tread life, and may
tire immediately sends a signal that short distance to a service station, affect the vehicle's handling and
Driving
causes the low tire pressure indicator proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to stopping ability.
to come on. the recommended pressure shown Because tire pressure varies by
on the driver's doorjamb. temperature and other conditions,
If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure the low tire pressure indicator may
is too low to continue driving, replace come on unexpectedly.
the tire with the compact spare tire
(see page 284).
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 235

For example, if you check and fill Each tire, including the spare, should When you restart the vehicle with
your tires in a warm area, then drive be checked monthly when cold, and the compact spare tire, the TPMS
in extremely cold weather, the tire set to the recommended inflation indicator may also come on and stay
pressure will be lower than pressure as specified on the tire on after driving several miles
measured and could be underinflated information label and in the owner's (kilometers).
and cause the low tire pressure manual (see page 274).
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire This indicator comes on and stays on
may become overinflated. However, if there is a problem with the tire
the low tire pressure indicator will pressure monitoring system.
not come on if the tires are If this happens, the system will shut
overinflated. off and no longer monitor tire
Refer to page 273 for tire inflation pressures. Have the system checked
guidelines. by your dealer as soon as possible.
Although your tire pressure is If the low tire pressure indicator or
monitored, you must manually check TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
the tire pressures monthly. systemꭧ automatically turns on even
if the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switchꭧ (see
page 234). If this happens, you
cannnot turn the VSA system off by
pressig the VSA off switch again.
ꭧ: If equipped
236 2009 Fit

Changing a Tire with TPMS The low tire pressure indicator or the As required by the FCC: This device
If you have a flat tire, the low tire TPMS indicator will go off, after complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
pressure indicator will come on. several miles (kilometers) driving, Operation is subject to the following two
Replace the flat tire with the compact when you replace the spare tire with conditions: (1) This device may not
spare tire (see page 284). the specified regular tire equipped cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
with the tire pressure monitor received, including interference that may
Each wheel (except the compact
sensor. cause undesired operation.
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside Never use a puncture-repairing agent Changes or modifications not expressly
the tire behind the valve stem. You in a flat tire. If used, you will have to approved by the party responsible for
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is replace the tire pressure sensor. compliance could void the user's
recommended that you always have Have the flat tire repaired by your authority to operate the equipment.
Driving
your tires serviced by your dealer or dealer as soon as possible.
qualified technician. This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
After you replace the flat tire with the subject to the following two conditions:
compact spare tire, the low tire (1) this device may not cause
pressure indicator stays on. This is interference, and (2) this device must
normal; the system is not monitoring accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
2009 Fit 237

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Towing a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Automatic transmission:

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a Motorhome Perform the following procedure
trailer. Attempting to do so can void Your vehicle can be towed behind a every day immediately before you
your warranties. motorhome at legal highway speeds begin towing. Otherwise severe
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not automatic transmission damage will
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h). occur.
Otherwise, severe transmission
1. Check the transmission fluid level
damage will occur.
(see page 259). Do not overfill.
When purchasing a tow bar, make 2. Start the engine.
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow 3. Press on the brake pedal. Move
the manufacturer's attachment the shift lever through all its
instructions carefully. positions.
4. Shift to the D position and hold for
5 seconds, then to N. Let the
engine run for 3 minutes, then turn
The steering system can be damaged if it off.
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
Severe transmission damage will occur
towing.
if the vehicle is shifted from reverse to
neutral and then towed with the drive
wheels on the ground.
238 2009 Fit

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
5. Release the parking brake. Extended Towing When towing your vehicle for long
If you tow more than 8 hours in one periods, remove the 20A Accessory
Manual transmission: day, you should repeat the above Socket and 30A Radio fuses to
1. Move the shifter into the Neutral procedure at least every 8 hours reduce drain on battery. These fuses
position. (when you stop for fuel, etc.) are located in the interior fuse box
2. Release the parking brake. and are shown as number 13 and 61
below.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the Failure to follow the recommended
steering wheel does not lock. Make instructions exactly will result in severe
sure the radio and any items plugged automatic transmission damage. If you
into the accessory power sockets are cannot shift the transmission or start
Driving
turned off so you do not run down the engine, your vehicle must be
the battery. transported on a flat-bed truck or
When you stop towing your vehicle trailer.
and shift out of the neutral position,
you may not be able to move the shift
lever from neutral to reverse or Park.
If this happens, press the brake pedal
and turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position, then shift out of
neutral.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 239

ACCESSORY SOCKET FUSE Only remove the fuses after you have On vehicles with navigation system
performed the transmission shifting The navigation system will also
procedure, and the key is in the disable itself. The next time you turn
ACCESSORY (I) position. Store the on the ignition switch, the system
fuses in an obvious location (center will require you to enter ‘‘ ENTER
pocket, etc) as a reminder to re- CODE ’’ before it can be used. Refer
install the fuses before driving the to the navigation system manual.
vehicle.
On vehicles without navigation system
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
191).
When the audio system is disabled,
the clock setting in the audio system
will be canceled. You will need to
reset the clock (see page 192).
RADIO FUSE
240 2009 Fit

Automatic transmission
If you tow a Fit behind a motorhome,
the transmission fluid must be
changed every 2 years or 30,000
miles (48,000 km), whichever comes
first.
Driving
2009 Fit 241
242 2009 Fit

Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ..................... 244

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder .................. 245
maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations ........................... 252
maintenance safety precautions. Adding Engine Oil ...................... 253
Changing the Engine Oil and
This section also includes
Filter ....................................... 254
instructions on how to read the
Engine Coolant ........................... 256
maintenance minder messages on
Windshield Washers ................... 258
the information display, and
Transmission Fluid ..................... 259
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
Fluid ................................... 259
yourself.
Manual Transmission Fluid .... 260
If you have the skills and tools to Brake and Clutch Fluid ............... 261
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Lights.......................................... 262
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Cleaning the Seat Belts ............... 267
to purchase the service manual. See Floor Mats .................................. 267
page 335 for information on how to Audio Antenna ............................ 268
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Dust and Pollen Filter ................. 268
Wiper Blades .............................. 269
Tires ........................................... 273
Checking the Battery .................. 279
Vehicle Storage ........................... 281
2009 Fit 243

Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this ● Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed.
the instructions before you begin, Failure to properly follow
and make sure you have the tools maintenance instructions and
Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
and skills required. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
● Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner's Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner's
● To clean parts, use a commercially manual.
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not gasoline. ●Carbon Monoxide poison from Some of the most important safety
engine exhaust. Be sure there is precautions are given here. However,
●
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, we cannot warn you of every
operate the engine. conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts. ●
Burns from hot parts. Let the performing maintenance. Only you
engine and exhaust system cool can decide whether or not you
● Wear eye protection and protective down before touching any parts. should perform a given task.
clothing when working with the
battery or compressed air.
244 2009 Fit

Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items on shown on the display according to
SELECT/RESET KNOB
the information display to show you this table:
when you should have your dealer Calculated Engine Displayed
perform engine oil replacement and Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
indicated maintenance service. 100%－91% 100%
Based on the engine operating 90%－81% 90%
conditions and accumulated engine 80%－71% 80%
revolutions, the onboard computer in
70%－61% 70%
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a 60%－51% 60%
percentage. ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
50%－41% 50%
40%－31% 40%
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 30%－21% 30%
turn the ignition switch to the ON 20%－16% 20%
(II) position, then press and release
15%－11% 15%
the select/reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator 10%－6% 10%
appears (see page 68). 5%－1% 5%
0% 0%
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 245

Maintenance Minder
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
MAINTENANCE ENGINE OIL LIFE

MINDER INDICATOR INDICATOR
If the remaining engine oil life is 15 The 15 and 11 percent oil life When the remaining engine oil life is
to 6 percent, you will see the engine indicator reminds you that the time is 5 to 1 percent, you will see a
oil life indicator every time you turn coming soon to take your vehicle in ‘‘ SERVICE ’’ message along with the
the ignition switch to the ON (II) for the required maintenance. same maintenance item code(s),
position. The maintenance minder every time you turn the ignition
indicator will also come on, and the switch to the ON (II) position.
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
above the ‘‘ OIL LIFE ’’ message.
246 2009 Fit

Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes

indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 248).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the maintenance minder NEGATIVE MILEAGE
indicator ( ) comes on every time When the remaining engine oil life is If you do not perform the indicated
Maintenance
you turn the ignition switch to the 0 percent, the engine oil life indicator maintenance, negative mileage is
ON (II) position, then it goes out if will blink. The display comes on displayed and begins to blink after
you switch the information display. every time you turn the ignition the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
When you see this message, have switch to the ON (II) position. The (10 km) or more.
the indicated maintenance performed maintenance minder indicator ( )
Negative mileage means your vehicle
by your dealer as soon as possible. also comes on and remains on in the
has passed the maintenance required
instrument panel. When you see this
point.
message, immediately have the
Immediately have the indicated
indicated maintenance done by your
maintenance done by your dealer.
dealer.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 247

Maintenance Minder
To change the information display Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
from the engine oil life display to the Items Display
odometer, the trip meter or average Your dealer will reset the display
fuel mileage, press and release the MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM after completing the required
select/reset knob. maintenance service. You will see
‘‘ OIL LIFE 100% ’’ on the information
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
display the next time you turn the
or negative mileage, the maintenance
minder indicator ( ) remains on
position.
even if you change the information
display. If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
Immediately have the service
reset the maintenance minder as
performed, and make sure to reset
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S) follows:
the display as described.
All maintenance items displayed on (II) position.
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these 2. Press the select/reset knob
maintenance codes, see page 251. repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
248 2009 Fit

Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service done
but do not reset the display, or reset
the display without doing the service,
the system will not show the proper
maintenance intervals. This can lead
to serious mechanical problems
because you will no longer have an
accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer knows
3. Press the select/reset knob for 4. Press the select/reset knob for your vehicle best and can provide
Maintenance
about 10 seconds. The engine oil another 5 seconds. The competent, efficient service.
life and the maintenance item maintenance item code(s) will
code(s) will blink. disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘ 100. ’’
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 249

Maintenance Minder
However, service at a dealer is not U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance, ● Engine oil level － Check every
mandatory to keep your warranties in replacement, or repair of time you fill the fuel tank. See page
effect. Maintenance may be done by emissions control devices and 201.
any qualified service facility or systems may be done by any ● Engine coolant level － Check the
person who is skilled in this type of automotive repair establishment
radiator reserve tank every time
automotive service. Make sure to or individual using parts that are
you fill the fuel tank. See page 202.
have the service facility or person ‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
reset the display as previously ● Automatic transmission － Check
According to state and federal
described. Keep all receipts as proof the fluid level monthly. See page
regulations, failure to perform
of completion, and have the person 259.
maintenance on the items marked
who does the work fill out your
with＃will not void your emissions ● Brakes － Check the fluid level
Honda Service History or Canadian
warranties. However, all monthly. See page 261.
Maintenance Log. Check your
maintenance services should be
warranty booklet for more ● Tires － Check the tire pressure
performed in accordance with the
information. monthly. Examine the tread for
intervals indicated by the information
wear and foreign objects. See page
We recommend using Honda parts display.
274.
and fluids whenever you have
Owner's Maintenance Checks
maintenance done. These are ● Lights － Check the operation of
You should check the following
manufactured to the same high the headlights, parking lights,
items at the specified intervals. If you
quality standards as the original taillights, high-mount brake light,
are unsure of how to perform any
components, so you can be confident and license plate lights monthly.
check, turn to the appropriate page
of their performance and durability. See page 262.
listed.
250 2009 Fit

Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A ● Replace engine oilꭧ1 1 ● Rotate tires
B ● Replace engine oil and oil filter 2 ● Replace air cleaner element
● Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
● Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km).
● Replace dust and pollen filter
● Inspect these items:
● Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
● Suspension components
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
Maintenance Minder
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
● Driveshaft boots
(24,000 km).
● Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
● Inspect drive belt
● All fluid levels and condition of fluids
3 ● Replace transmission fluid
●
Exhaust system＃ Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
●
Fuel lines and connections＃ speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more
ꭧ1: If the message ‘‘ SERVICE ’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the frequently than recommended by the maintenance
display is reset, change the engine oil every year. minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these
conditions, have the transmission fluid changed at
＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 249. 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km). (For A/T only)
NOTE: ● Independent of maintenance message in the information display, replace If you tow a FIT behind a motorhome, the transmission
the brake fluid every 3 years. fluid must be changed every 2 years or 30,000 miles
● Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). (48,000 km), whichever comes first. (For A/T only)
● ●
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy. 4 Replace spark plugs
●
Inspect valve clearance
5 ● Replace engine coolant
2009 Fit 251

Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

(Orange loop)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)
252 2009 Fit

Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil Honda Motor Oil is the preferred

Oil is a major contributor to your 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
engine's performance and longevity. highly recommended that you use
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
detergent oil displaying the API optimum engine protection. Make
Certification Seal. This seal indicates sure the API Certification Seal says
the oil is energy conserving, and that ‘‘ For Gasoline Engines. ’’
it meets the American Petroleum
The oil viscosity or weight is
Institute's latest requirements.
provided on the container's label.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
Unscrew and remove the engine oil fuel economy.
Maintenance
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in the
oil slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could Ambient Temperature
damage the engine.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 253

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and WASHER

You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter
it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter
given for a conventional motor oil, it according to the maintenance
displays the API Certification Seal, messages shown on the information
and it is the proper weight. You must display. The oil and filter collect
follow the oil and filter change contaminants that can damage your
intervals shown on the information engine if they are not removed
display. regularly.
Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires
Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from OIL DRAIN BOLT
additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- 1. Run the engine until it reaches
performance and durability. normal operating temperature,
type hydraulic lift for this service.
then shut it off.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have 2. Open the hood, and remove the
this maintenance done by a skilled engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
mechanic. drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
254 2009 Fit

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 5. Put a new washer on the drain

bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to: Improper disposal of engine oil can be
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m, 4.0 kgf·m) harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
6. Refill the engine with the the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
recommended oil. container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
Engine oil change capacity or dump it on the ground.
(including filter):
3.8 US qt (3.6 L)
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap. Start
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
Maintenance
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your seconds. If it does not, turn off the
dealer) is required. engine, and check your work.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is 8. Let the engine run for several
not stuck to the engine block. If it minutes, then check the drain bolt
is, remove it before installing a and oil filter for leaks.
new oil filter. 9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
4. Install a new oil filter according to several minutes, then check the oil
the instructions that come with it. level on the dipstick. If necessary,
Make sure to clean off any dirt and add more oil.
dust on the connecting surface of a
new oil filter.
2009 Fit 255

Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the
is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or plain
water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not Removing the radiator cap
available, you may use another while the engine is hot can
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a cause the coolant to spray out,
temporary replacement. Make sure it seriously scalding you.
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum Always let the engine and
RESERVE TANK radiator cool down before
engines. Continued use of any non-
If the coolant level in the reserve Honda coolant can result in removing the radiator cap.
tank is at or below the MIN line, add corrosion, causing the cooling
coolant to bring it up to the MAX system to malfunction or fail. Have
line. Inspect the cooling system for the cooling system flushed and
leaks. refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
256 2009 Fit

Engine Coolant
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle's
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 4. The coolant level should be up to
Maintenance
are cool. the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap Pour the coolant slowly and
counterclockwise, without carefully so you do not spill any.
pressing down. Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
3. Remove the radiator cap by
engine compartment.
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise. 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
2009 Fit 257

Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the Fill up to here On Canadian models: The low washer
windshield washer reservoir at least level indicator comes on when the
monthly during normal use. This level is low (see page 65).
reservoir supplies the windshield and
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
rear window washers.
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR on a clean cloth. This will help to
On U.S. models: To check the condition the blade edges.
windshield washer fluid level, open
the hood and look the windshield
washer reservoir located behind the
right headlight. You will see a ‘‘ 1/2 ’’ Do not use engine antifreeze or a
mark on the reservoir. vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle's paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
258 2009 Fit

Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid 4. Remove the dipstick, and check

DIPSTICK the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
HOT UPPER
MARK MARK 5. If the level is below the lower
LOWER mark, add fluid into the dipstick
MARK
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) spill immediately; it could damage
Maintenance
from the transmission, and wipe it components in the engine
Check the fluid level with the engine compartment.
with a clean cloth.
at normal operating temperature.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into Always use Honda ATF-Z1
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. (automatic transmission fluid).
the transmission securely as
Start the engine, let it run until the
shown in the illustration.
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 259

Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid Put a new washer on the filler bolt,

then reinstall the filler bolt and
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 FILLER BOLT tighten it securely.
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do not
mix with other transmission fluids. If Honda MTF is not available, you
Using transmission fluid other than may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause viscosity motor oil with the API
deterioration in transmission operation Certification seal that says ‘‘ FOR
and durability, and could result in GASOLINE ENGINES ’’ as a
damage to the transmission. temporary replacement. However,
Damage resulting from the use of motor oil does not contain the proper
transmission fluid other than Honda additives, and continued use can
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Correct level WASHER cause stiffer shifting. Replace as soon
Honda new vehicle warranty. as it is convenient.
Check the fluid level with the If you are not sure how to check and
transmission at normal operating add fluid, contact your dealer.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back temperature and the vehicle on level
into the transmission securely as ground.
shown in the illustration. Remove the transmission filler bolt,
If you are not sure how to add fluid, and carefully feel inside the bolt hole
contact your dealer. with your finger. The fluid level
should be up to the edge of the bolt
hole. If it is not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole.
260 2009 Fit

Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not Brake Fluid
reservoirs monthly. compatible with your vehicle's
There are up to two reservoirs, braking system and can cause
depending on the model. They are: extensive damage.
●
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
●
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission models
only)
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule. MAX MIN
Maintenance
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not The fluid level should be between
available, you should use only DOT 3 the MIN and MAX marks on the side
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed of the reservoir. If the level is at or
container, as a temporary below the MIN mark, your brake
replacement. system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can worn brake pads/shoes.
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 261

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Lights
Clutch Fluid Headlight Aiming ELECTRICAL BULB HOLD-DOWN

Manual Transmission only The headlights were properly aimed CONNECTOR WIRE
when your vehicle was new. If you
MAX
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area, readjustment may be
required. Adjustments should be
done by your dealer or another
qualified mechanic.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle RUBBER WEATHER SEAL
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard 1. Open the hood.
MIN
objects. If you touch the glass, clean 2. Remove the electrical connector
The fluid level should be between it with denatured alcohol and a clean from the bulb by pulling the
the MIN and MAX marks on the side cloth. connector straight back.
of the reservoir. If it is not, add brake 3. Remove the rubber weather seal
fluid to bring it up to that level. Use by pulling on the tab.
the same fluid specified for the brake
system. Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
A low fluid level can indicate a leak in when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
the clutch system. Have this system on the glass can cause the bulb to
inspected as soon as possible. overheat and shatter.
262 2009 Fit

Lights
4. Unclip the end of the hold-down HOLD-DOWN Replacing a Parking Light/Front

wire from its slot. Pivot the wire WIRE Side Marker Bulb
out of the way, then remove the
bulb.
5. Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
INSPECTION WINDOW
6. Make sure that the hold-down wire
Maintenance
is installed properly and securely.
You can check its installation from
1. Open the hood.
the inspection window on the
headlight assembly. 2. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
7. Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
8. Push the electrical connector onto
into the socket until it bottoms.
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the 4. Reinstall the socket into the light
headlights to test the new bulb. assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 263

Lights
5. Turn on the lights to make sure Replacing a Front Turn Signal 5. Reinstall the socket into the light
the new bulb is working. Light Bulb assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pushing the bulb in and turning
it counterclockwise until it unlocks.
4. Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
264 2009 Fit

Lights
Replacing a Fog Light Bulb 5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
On Sport model and turn it one-quarter turn
The fog lights use halogen bulbs. clockwise to lock it in place.
When replacing a bulb, handle it
6. Push the electrical connector back
carefully. See page 262 for more
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
information.
all the way.
7. Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
8. Reinstall the fog light assembly,
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR then tighten the screw.
3. Remove the electrical connector
Maintenance
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
SCREW 4. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to counterclockwise.
remove the screw.
2. To remove the fog light assembly,
pull it out of the bumper.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 265

Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs 4. Remove the burned out bulb from

the socket by pulling it straight out
of its socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the socket.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
7. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
8. Reinstall the light assembly cover.
LIGHT ASSEMBLY COVER 2. Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
back-up light, or turn signal light.
the edge of the light assembly
cover. Remove the cover by 3. Remove the socket by turning it
carefully prying in the notch on its one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
middle edge with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
266 2009 Fit

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat Floor Mats
belt anchors can cause the belts to (Optional)
LOOP retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm Unlock
water or isopropyl alcohol. Lock
Maintenance
KNOB
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap The driver's floor mat that came with
and warm water to clean them. Do your vehicle hooks over the floor mat
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning anchors. To lock each hook, turn the
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before knob clockwise. This keeps the floor
you use the vehicle. mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
When cleaning or replacing, turn the
knob counterclockwise to unhook
the floor mat.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 267

Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter
If you remove the driver's floor mat, Audio Antenna Dust and Pollen Filter
make sure to re-anchor it when you On models with A/C
put it back in your vehicle. This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
If you use a non-Honda floor mats,
outside through the heating and
make sure they fit properly and that
cooling system.
they can be anchored securely. Do
not put additional floor mats on top of Have your dealer replace the filter
the anchored mat. when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomes less than usual.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna at the rear of the roof. Before
using a ‘‘ drive-through ’’ car wash,
remove the antenna by unscrewing it by
hand. This prevents the antenna from
being damaged by the car wash
brushes.
268 2009 Fit

Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
LOCK TAB
To replace a front wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly
Maintenance
from the wiper arm:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver's side ●
Put a cloth on the edge of the
first, then the passenger's side. lock tab, then push up on the
lock tab carefully with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Do not open the hood when the wiper

arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 269

Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM BLADE 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If

they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in the
slots along the edge of the new
blade.
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
TOP
●
Pivot the blade assembly toward 3. Remove the blade from its holder
the wiper arm until it releases by grabbing the tabbed end of the
from the wiper arm. blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Make sure the two rubber tabs

inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
270 2009 Fit

Wiper Blades
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Push down the
lock tab. Make sure the wiper
blade assembly locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger's
side first, then the driver's side.
5. Place the top of the wiper blade on To replace the rear wiper blade:
Maintenance
the end of the blade assembly, and 1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
slide the blade onto the assembly. window.
Make sure the blade is completely 2. Disconnect the blade assembly
installed. from the wiper arm by pivoting the
blade assembly upward.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 271

Wiper Blades
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
3. Slide the blade out of the holder. 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If 5. Slide the new blade into the
they have no plastic or metal holder. Make sure it is engaged in
reinforcement along the back the slot along its full length.
edge, remove the metal
Insert both ends of the blade into
reinforcement strips from the old
the holder. Make sure they are
wiper blade, and install them in the
secure.
slots along the edge of the new
blade. 6. Install the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the
windshield.
272 2009 Fit

Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Even though your vehicle is
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated equipped with TPMS, we
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of recommend that you visually check
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding your tires every day. If you think a
comfort. tire might be low, check it
The following pages give more
immediately with a tire gauge.
detailed information on how to take ●
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel Use a gauge to measure the air
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to pressure in each tire at least once a
fail from being overheated. month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
● Overinflated tires can make your
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per
vehicle ride more harshly, are
Using tires that are excessively month. Remember to check the
more prone to damage from road
worn or improperly inflated can spare tire (if equipped) at the same
Maintenance
hazards, and wear unevenly.
cause a crash in which you can time.
be seriously hurt or killed. The tire pressure monitoring system
Check the air pressures when the
(TPMS)ꭧ warns you when a tire
tires are cold. This means the vehicle
Follow all instructions in this pressure is low. See page 235 for
has been parked for at least 3 hours,
owner's manual regarding tire more information.
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
inflation and maintenance. ꭧ: If equipped Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 273

Tires
If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures If equipped
tires are hot [driven for several miles The following charts show the The compact spare tire pressure is:
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4 recommended cold tire pressures for 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 most normal and high-speed driving
For convenience, the recommended
kgf/cm2) higher than the cold conditions.
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
readings. This is normal. Do not let
All models except Sport on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure For additional information about your
for Normal Driving
underinflated. tires, see page 323.
175/65R15 84S Front/Rear:
You should get your own tire 32 psi (220 kPa,
pressure gauge and use it whenever 2.2 kgf/cm2)
you check your tire pressures. This Sport model
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
and not due to a variation between
gauges. 185/55R16 83H Front/Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa,
While tubeless tires have some 2.3 kgf/cm2)
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
274 2009 Fit

Tires
Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARK Tire Service Life

Every time you check inflation, you The service life of your tires is
should also examine the tires for dependent on many factors,
damage, foreign objects, and wear. including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
You should look for: loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
●
Bumps or bulges in the tread or environmental conditions (even
side of the tire. Replace the tire if when the tires are not in use).
you find either of these conditions.
● Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of In addition to your regular
the tire. Replace the tire if you can TREAD WEAR INDICATOR inspections and inflation pressure
see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
Maintenance
● Excessive tread wear. molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 performed once the tires reach five
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the years old. It is also recommended
tread. This shows there is less than that all tires, including the spare, be
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on removed from service after 10 years
the tire. from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
A tire this worn gives very little of wear.
traction on wet roads. You should The last four digits of the TIN (tire
replace the tire if you can see three identification number) are found on
or more tread wear indicators.
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 323).
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 275

Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

In addition to proper inflation, correct Replace your tires with radial tires of
Front Front
wheel alignment helps to decrease the same size, load range, speed
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn rating, and maximum cold tire
unevenly, have your dealer check the pressure rating (as shown on the
wheel alignment. tire's sidewall).
Have your dealer check the tires if Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
you feel a consistent vibration while your vehicle can reduce braking
driving. A tire should always be ability, traction, and steering
rebalanced if it is removed from the accuracy. Using tires of a different
wheel. When you have new tires size or construction can cause the
(For Non-directional (For Directional
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS and vehicle stability assist
balanced. This increases riding system (VSA)ꭧ to work
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and inconsistently.
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate The ABS and VSA systemꭧ work by
balance. the tires according to the comparing the speed of the wheels.
maintenance messages displayed on When replacing tires, use the same
the information display. Move the size originally supplied with the
tires to the positions shown in the vehicle. Tire size and construction
On vehicles with aluminum wheels, illustration each time they are can affect wheel speed and may
improper wheel weights can damage rotated. If you purchase directional cause the system to activate.
your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use tires, rotate only front-to-back.
only Honda wheel weights for ꭧ: If equipped
When the tires are rotated, make
balancing. sure the air pressures are checked.
276 2009 Fit

Tires
It is best to replace all four tires at Wheel and Tire Specifications

the same time. If that is not possible Wheels:
or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your All models except Sport
tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and 15 x 5 1/2J
Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash Sport model
affect your vehicle's handling. in which you can be seriously 16 x 6J
hurt or killed.
If you ever replace a wheel, make Tires:
sure that the wheel's specifications Always use the size and type of All models except Sport
match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this 175/65R15 84S
owner's manual. Sport model
Also be sure you use only TPMS
185/55R16 83H
specific wheels (if equipped). If you
do not, the tire pressure monitoring See page 321 for DOT tire quality
Maintenance
system will not work. grading information, and page 323
for tire size and labeling information.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 277

Tires
Winter Driving Tire Chains

Tires marked ‘‘ M ＋ S ’’ or ‘‘ All Mount tire chains on your tires when
Season ’’ on the sidewall have an all- required by driving conditions or local Traction devices that are the wrong size
weather tread design suitable for laws. Install them only on the front or improperly installed can damage
most winter driving conditions. tires. your vehicle's brake lines, suspension,
body, and wheels. Stop driving if they
For the best performance in snowy Because your vehicle has limited tire are hitting any part of the vehicle.
or icy conditions, you should install clearance, Honda strongly
snow tires or tire chains. They may recommends using the chains listed
be required by local laws under below, made by Security Chain
certain conditions. Company (SCC).
Snow Tires All models except Sport Using the wrong chains, or not
If you mount snow tires on your SC1026 properly installing chains, can
vehicle, make sure they are radial damage the brake lines and
tires of the same size and load range Sport model cause a crash in which you can
as the original tires. Mount snow SC1030 be seriously injured or killed.
tires on all four wheels. The traction When installing cables, follow the
provided by snow tires on dry roads manufacturer's instructions, and Follow all instructions in this
may be lower than your original tires. mount them as tight as you can. Make owner's manual regarding the
Check with the tire dealer for sure they are not contacting the brake selection and use of tire chains.
maximum speed recommendations. lines or suspension. Drive slowly with
them installed. If you hear them
coming into contact with the body or
chassis, stop and investigate. Remove
them as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
278 2009 Fit

Tires, Checking the Battery
Wheels Checking the Battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a

Clean the wheels as you would the white or yellowish powder). To
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
rest of the exterior. Wash them with remove it, cover the terminals with a
the same solution, and rinse them solution of baking soda and water. It
thoroughly. will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
If equipped
water. Dry off the battery with a cloth
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
or paper towel. Coat the terminals
protective clear-coat that keeps the
with grease to help prevent future
aluminum from corroding and
corrosion.
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some If additional battery maintenance is
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff needed, see your dealer or a
brush can damage the clear-coat. To qualified technician.
Maintenance
clean the wheels, use a mild Check the condition of the battery
detergent and a soft brush or sponge. monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator's
colors.
The location of the test indicator
window varies between
manufacturers.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 279

Checking the Battery
WARNING: Battery posts, On vehicles with navigation system

terminals, and related accessories The navigation system will also
contain lead and lead compounds. The battery gives off explosive disable itself. The next time you turn
Wash your hands after handling. hydrogen gas during normal on the ignition switch, the system
operation. will require you to enter ‘‘ ENTER
If you need to connect the battery to
CODE ’’ before it can be used. Refer
a charger, disconnect both cables to A spark or flame can cause the to the navigation system manual.
prevent damaging your vehicle's battery to explode with enough
electrical system. Always disconnect force to kill or seriously hurt
the negative (－) cable first, and you.
reconnect it last.
On vehicles without navigation system Wear protective clothing and a
If your vehicle's battery is face shield, or have a skilled
disconnected, or goes dead, the time technician do the battery
setting is lost. To reset the time, see maintenance.
page 192.
If your vehicle's battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system may disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio, you
will see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
191).
280 2009 Fit

Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for ● If the vehicle is to be stored for a ● Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 longer period, it should be ‘‘ breathable ’’ cover, one made
month), there are several things you supported on jackstands so the from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. tires are off the ground. cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
● Leave one window open slightly (if
deterioration and makes it easier to which can damage the paint.
the vehicle is being stored
get your vehicle back on the road. If
indoors). ● If possible, periodically run the
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
engine until it reaches full
● Disconnect the battery.
● Fill the fuel tank. operating temperature (the cooling
● Support the front and rear wiper fans cycle on and off twice).
● Wash and dry the exterior
blade arms with a folded towel or Preferably, do this once a month.
completely.
rag so they do not touch the
● Clean the interior. Make sure the windshield.
Maintenance
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are ● To minimize sticking, apply a
completely dry.
silicone spray lubricant to all door
● Leave the parking brake off. Put and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
the transmission in reverse vehicle body wax to the painted
(manual) or Park (automatic). surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
● Block the rear wheels.
2009 Fit 281

282 2009 Fit

Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire .................... 284
common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ................... 285
experience with their vehicles. It Temporarily Repairing a Flat
gives you information about how to Tire ......................................... 291
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Won't Start ............. 297
to do to correct it. If the problem has Jump Starting .............................. 299
stranded you on the side of the road, If the Engine Overheats .............. 301
you may be able to get going again. If Low Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 303
not, you will also find instructions on Charging System Indicator ......... 303
getting your vehicle towed. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 304
Brake System Indicator ............... 305
Fuses .......................................... 306
Fuse Locations ............................ 309
Emergency Towing ..................... 311

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck .......... 312
2009 Fit 283

Compact Spare Tire
Except all Canadian models with Follow these precautions: INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
automatic transmission
Use the compact spare tire as a
● Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
temporary replacement only. Get ● This tire gives a harsher ride and
your regular tire repaired or less traction on some road
replaced, and put it back on your surfaces. Use greater caution while
vehicle as soon as you can. driving.
Check the inflation pressure of the ●
Do not mount tire chains on the
compact spare tire every time you compact spare tire.
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
● Do not use your compact spare tire TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) on another vehicle unless it is the
same make and model. Replace the tire when you can see
● On vehicles with the TPMS the tread wear indicator bars. The
system, the low tire pressure replacement should be the same size
indicator comes on and stays on and design tire, mounted on the
after you replace the flat tire with same wheel. The spare tire is not
the compact spare tire. After designed to be mounted on a regular
several miles (kilometers) driving wheel, and the spare wheel is not
with the compact spare tire, the designed for mounting a regular tire.
TPMS indicator comes on and the
low tire pressure indicator goes
off.
284 2009 Fit

Changing a Flat Tire
Except all Canadian models with FLOOR LID LOOP

automatic transmission
If you have a flat tire while driving, The vehicle can easily roll off SPARE
stop in a safe place to change it. the jack, seriously injuring TIRE
Drive slowly along the shoulder until anyone underneath.
you get to an exit or an area to stop Follow the directions for
that is far away from the traffic lanes. changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
TOOL KIT JACK STRAP
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 4. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo
non-slippery ground. Put the area floor lid by lifting it up with
transmission in Park (automatic) the back of the strap. To keep the

or reverse (manual). Apply the floor lid open, hook the looped
parking brake. side of the strap to the legs of the
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, rear center head restraint.
and turn the ignition switch to the 5. Take the tool kit out of the spare
LOCK (0) position. Have all tire.
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
3. Lift the rear center head restraint.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 285

EXTENSION WHEEL NUT
WHEEL COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH

6. Take the jack out of the cargo area. 8. On all models except Sport and 9. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
Canadian LX model with manual with the wheel nut wrench.
Turn the jack's end bracket
transmission, remove the wheel
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
cover by carefully prying under its
remove the jack by lifting it
edge with the flat tip of the
straight up.
extension.
7. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
286 2009 Fit

BRAKE HUB
EXTENSION
JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH

10. Place the jack under the jacking 11. Use the extension and the wheel 13. Before mounting the spare tire,
point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
change. It is pointed to by a △ vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with

mark molded into the underside of ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
the body (Sport model). Turn the carefully; it may be hot from
12. Remove the wheel nuts, then
end bracket clockwise until the top driving.
remove the flat tire. Handle the
of the jack contacts the jacking
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
point. Make sure the jacking point
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
tab is resting in the jack notch.
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 287

14. Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against the
hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
15. Lower the vehicle to the ground, TAB
and remove the jack.
FLOOR LID
16. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 18. Remove the strap loop from the
the same crisscross pattern. Have legs of the head restraint and
the wheel nut torque checked at lower the cargo area floor lid.
the nearest automotive service
19. Pull the floor lid toward you and
facility.
remove the tabs.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m, 11 kgf·m) 20. Pull the floor lid out.
17. On Sport model and Canadian LX
model with manual transmission:
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire.
288 2009 Fit

23. Store the jack. Place the tool kit in 24. Place the floor lid in the cargo
the center of the flat tire. area.
25. Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the cargo area. Make sure
will not get scratched or damaged.
Loose items can fly around the
For For 26. Close the tailgate.
nomal spare interior in a crash and could
tire tire seriously injure the occupants. 27. On U.S. models
Your vehicle's original tire has a
Store the wheel, jack, and tools tire pressure monitoring system
securely before driving. sensor. To replace a tire, refre to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
21. Place the flat tire face down in the page 237).
spare tire well.
22. Secure the flat tire by screwing the

wing bolt back into its hole.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 289

Installing a wheel cover
WIRE SUPPORT RING

CLIPS CLIPS 2. Align the valve mark on the wheel 3. Make sure the wire support ring is
cover to the tire valve on the on the outer side of the tire valve
All models except Sport and Canadian
LX model with manual transmission wheel, then install the wheel as shown.
cover.
1. Make sure the wire support ring is
hooked into the clips around the
edge of the wheel cover.
290 2009 Fit

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
How to Use the Tire Repair Kit If you have a flat tire while driving, TIRE VALVE
All Canadian models with automatic park the vehicle on a level surface in
transmission a safe place, put the transmission in
To reduce weight, your vehicle is Park (P), set the parking brake, and
equipped with a tire repair kit instead turn the hazard lights on.
of a spare tire. This kit will allow you Thoroughly examine the tire for a
to temporarily repair a flat tire under puncture or other damage.
the following conditions:
If a puncture is wider than 3/16ths of
● Only one tire is flat. an inch (4 mm), or is located in the
● The puncture is smaller than 3/ tire sidewall, do not attempt to repair
16ths of an inch (4 mm). the tire. Have your vehicle towed to a VALVE CAP
Honda service center. In Canada or
● The puncture is located within the the continental U.S.A. simply call 1- 1. Park vehicle on a level surface in a
tread. 800-465-PLUS (7587) for Honda Plus safe place. Set shifter lever into
Roadside Assistance. PARK and engage the parking

●
The wheel rim is not damaged. brake. Turn hazard light on.
●
The tire bead is seated. If the damage is smaller than 3/16ths Remove valve cap from tire valve.
of an inch (4 mm) and within the tire
When making a temporary repair, tread, proceed with the following
carefully follow all instructions in this instructions.
owner's manual and in the
instructions that came with the kit.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 291

FLOOR LID LOOP ● An empty recovery bottle. A tire

repair professional will use this to
collect the injected sealant from the
tire during the permanent repair.
TIRE REPAIR KIT STRAP

2. Lift the rear center head restraint. Your tire repair kit contains:
3. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo ● An air pump with a power cord and
area floor lid by lifting it up with the an air hose attached.
back of the strap. To keep the floor EXPIRATION DATE
● A bottle of sealant with a filler hose
lid open, hook the looped side of attached. 4. Remove the sealant bottle and
the strap to the legs of the rear check the expiration date on the
center head restraint. ● Two labels, one for the tire wheel label. If the date has expired, do not
and one for the instrument panel. continue. Have your vehicle towed
to the nearest Honda service
● An instruction sheet.
center. In Canada or the
continental U.S.A. simply call 1-800-
465-PLUS (7587) for Honda Plus
Roadside Assistance.
292 2009 Fit

If the date has not expired, shake AIR PUMP BOTTLE CAP ADAPTER PLUG
the bottle thoroughly and proceed
to step 5.
TIRE VALVE
BOTTLE
CAP
AIR PUMP HOSE ACCESSORY SOCKET

6. Unscrew the bottle cap from the 8. Route the power cord into the
bottle adapter. vehicle, and insert the plug into the
BOTTLE HOSE 7. Remove the air pump from the accessory power socket.

5. Screw the sealant filler hose onto repair kit, then screw the air pump Pay attention not to have the power
the tire valve. Make sure the bottle hose onto the bottle adapter tightly. cord pinched by the door.
remains upright to ensure all of the
sealant flows into the tire. 9. Turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 293

In freezing temperatures, turn the AIR PUMP SWITCH 11. Inflate the tire to 33 psi (230 kPa),
engine on and leave it running then turn the air pump switch OFF
while the flat tire is being serviced. for an accurate pressure reading. If
Prolonged exposure to the cold OFF the pressure fails to reach 33 psi
may cause the vehicle's battery to (230 kPa) within 15 minutes, do
weaken. Under cold conditions, ON not continue, and have the vehicle
safely start the vehicle's engine and towed. In Canada or the
keep the engine running at idle continental U.S.A. simply call 1-
when operating the air pump. 800-465-PLUS (7587) for Honda
Plus Roadside Assistance.
Running the engine with the LOCK (0) position.
10. Turn the air pump on to inflate the
vehicle in an enclosed or even tire. Do not run the air pump for 13. Remove the sealant bottle hose
partly enclosed area can cause more than 15 minutes or it may from the tire valve, then reinstall
a rapid build-up of toxic carbon overheat. The air pressure gauge the tire valve cap.
monoxide. will show about 40 to 60 psi (275 to
Breathing this colorless, 415 kPa) for the first few minutes
odorless gas can cause while the sealant is pumped into
unconsciousness and even the tire, and then the pressure will
death. Only run the engine to go down to about 10 to 20 psi (70
power the air pump with the to 140 kPa).
vehicle outdoors.
294 2009 Fit

AIR PRESSURE GAUGE LABEL
WHEEL LABEL
DEFLATE BUTTON
14. Push the deflate button on the air 15. Remove the wheel label from the 16. Remove the front pillar label from
pump until the air pressure gauge repair kit, wipe any dirt off the the repair kit and place it as shown
shows 0 psi. wheel with a clean cloth, and above.

attach the label to the center of the
wheel. 17. Remove the power plug from the
accessory power socket.
The label may adhere poorly when
cold. Clean the surface and 18. Return all items except the air
securely attach the label. pump to the repair kit, and store
the kit in the cargo floor box. Keep
the air pump handy as you may
need it soon.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 295

19. Drive carefully within the speed of If pressure is less than 19 psi (130
50 mph (80 km/h) for 5 minutes. kPa), do not drive the vehicle
further or attempt to re-inflate the
tire. Call or wait for help. If
pressure is lower than 33 psi (230
VALVE CAP TIRE VALVE kPa) and higher than 19 psi (130
kPa), use air pump to bring tire
pressure to 33 psi (230 kPa).
21. Then, drive carefully within the
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for 5
AIR PUMP HOSE minutes more.
20. Stop safely and check the pressure 22. Stop safely and check the pressure
in the tire. Remove the tire valve in the tire.
cap, screw the air pump hose onto
the tire valve, and check the air
gauge. (You do not need to attach
the power cord or turn the air
pump switch on.)
296 2009 Fit

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won't Start
If the pressure is lower than 32 psi If the Engine Won't Start Nothing Happens or the Starter
(220 kPa) and higher than 19 psi Diagnosing why the engine won't Motor Operates Very Slowly
(130 kPa), use the air pump to start falls into two areas, depending When you turn the ignition switch to
bring air to the desired level as on what you hear when you turn the the START (III) position, you do not
described in step 11. Then drive to ignition switch to the START (III) hear the normal noise of the engine
the nearest service station at no position: trying to start. You may hear a
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
●
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine's starter nothing at all.
If the pressure is below 19 psi, do
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things:
not continue. Have the vehicle
towed (see page 311). operates very slowly. ● Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
In any case, be sure to have the ● You can hear the starter motor
the clutch pedal must be pushed
damaged tire permanently repaired operating normally, or the starter
all the way to the floor or the
as soon as possible. motor sounds like it is spinning
starter will not operate. With an
faster than normal, but the engine
Remember to return the tire sealant automatic transmission, it must be

does not start up and run.
bottle to your Honda service center in Park or neutral.
for proper disposal. ● Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 299.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 297

If the Engine Won't Start
● Turn the ignition switch to the The Starter Operates Normally ● Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
START (III) position. If the In this case, the starter motor's speed gauge; the low fuel indicator may
headlights do not dim, check the sounds normal, or even faster than not be working.
condition of the fuses. If the fuses normal, when you turn the ignition ● There may be an electrical
are OK, there is probably switch to the START (III) position,
problem, such as no power to the
something wrong with the but the engine does not run.
fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see
electrical circuit for the ignition ●
Are you using a properly coded page 306).
switch or starter motor. You will
key? An improperly coded key will
need a qualified technician to If you find nothing wrong, you will
cause the immobilizer system
determine the problem. See need a qualified technician to find the
indicator in the instrument panel
Emergency Towing on page 311. problem. See Emergency Towing on
to blink rapidly (see page 79).
page 311.
If the headlights dim noticeably or go ● Are you using the proper starting
out when you try to start the engine, procedure? Refer to Starting the
either the battery is discharged or Engine on page 216.
the connections are corroded. Check
the condition of the battery and
terminal connections (see page 279).
You can then try jump starting the
vehicle from a booster battery (see
page 299).
298 2009 Fit

Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

procedure, you should take several 1. Open the hood, and check the
precautions. physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
A battery can explode if you do jump starting until it thaws.
not follow the correct
procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the BOOSTER BATTERY
Keep all sparks, open flames, electrolyte inside can freeze. Attempting
and smoking materials away The numbers in the illustration show
to jump start with a frozen battery can you the order to connect the jumper
from the battery. cause it to rupture. cables.

You cannot start your vehicle with an 2. Turn off all the electrical
automatic transmission by pushing accessories: heater, A/C (if
or pulling it. equipped), audio system, lights,
etc. Put the transmission in neutral
(manual) or Park (automatic), and
set the parking brake.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 299

Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start that
vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
3. Remove the cover from the under- 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
hood fuse box (see page 306). to the negative (－) terminal on then from the booster battery.
Connect one jumper cable to the the booster battery. Connect the Keep the ends of the jumper cables
positive (＋) terminal on your other end to the ground strap as away from each other and any metal
battery. Connect the other end to shown. Do not connect this jumper on the vehicle until everything is
the positive (＋) terminal on the cable to any other part of the disconnected. Otherwise, you may
booster battery. engine. cause an electrical short.
300 2009 Fit

If the Engine Overheats
The high temperature indicator 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

should be off under most conditions. leave the engine running, and
If the engine coolant temperature Steam and spray from an check the high temperature
gets higher than normal, the overheated engine can indicator. If the high heat is due to
indicator will blink. If it stays on, you seriously scald you. overloading, the engine should
should determine the reason (hot start to cool down almost
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.). Do not open the hood if steam immediately. If it does, wait until
is coming out. the high temperature indicator
If the vehicle overheats, you should
goes off, then continue driving.
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the high 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the high temperature indicator
temperature indicator blinking or Put the transmission in neutral stays on, turn off the engine.
remaining on. Or you may see steam (manual) or Park (automatic), and
or spray coming from under the set the parking brake. Turn off all
hood. accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.

2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
Driving with the high temperature off the engine. Wait until you see
indicator on can cause serious damage no more signs of steam or spray,
to your engine. then open the hood.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 301

If the Engine Overheats
5. Look for any obvious coolant 9. Start the engine, and set the
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. temperature control dial to
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the radiator cap maximum heat. Add coolant to the
so use caution. If you find a leak, it while the engine is hot can radiator up to the base of the filler
must be repaired before you cause the coolant to spray out, neck. If you do not have the proper
continue driving (see Emergency seriously scalding you. coolant mixture available, you can
Towing on page 311). add plain water. Remember to
Always let the engine and have the cooling system drained
6. If you don't find an obvious leak, radiator cool down before and refilled with the proper
check the coolant level in the removing the radiator cap. mixture as soon as you can.
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark. 10. Put the radiator cap back on
8. Using gloves or a large heavy tightly. Run the engine, and check
7. If there was no coolant in the cloth, turn the radiator cap the high temperature indicator. If
reserve tank, you may need to add counterclockwise, without pushing it begins to blink or comes on
coolant to the radiator. Let the down, to the first stop. After the again, the engine needs repair (see
engine cool down until the high pressure releases, push down on Emergency Towing on page 311).
temperature indicator goes off the cap, and turn it until it comes
before checking the radiator. off. 11. If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has gone
down, add coolant to the MAX
mark. Put the cap back on tightly.
302 2009 Fit

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning lights. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very Open the hood, and check the oil battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine level (see page 201). An engine Immediately turn off all electrical
damage is possible, and you should very low on oil can lose pressure accessories. Try not to use other
take immediate action. during cornering and other driving electrically operated controls such as
maneuvers. the power windows. Keep the engine
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the running; starting the engine will
level back to the full mark on the discharge the battery rapidly.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical dipstick (see page 253). Go to a service station or garage
damage almost immediately. Turn off 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil where you can get technical
the engine as soon as you can safely get pressure indicator. If it does not go assistance.

the vehicle stopped. out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
311).
2009 Fit 303

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, Readiness Codes

while driving, it means one even though it may go off as you Your vehicle has certain ‘‘ readiness
of the engine's emissions control continue driving, have your vehicle codes ’’ that are part of the on-board
systems may have a problem. Even checked by a dealer as soon as diagnostics for the emissions
though you may feel no difference in possible. systems. In some states, part of the
your vehicle's performance, it can emissions testing is to make sure
reduce your fuel economy and cause these codes are set. If they are not
increased emissions. Continued set, the test cannot be completed.
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the malfunction If the battery in your vehicle has
If you have recently refueled your indicator lamp on, you can damage been disconnected or gone dead,
vehicle, the indicator coming on your vehicle's emissions controls and these codes are erased. It can take
could be due to a loose or missing engine. Those repairs may not be several days of driving under various
fuel fill cap. You will also see a covered by your vehicle's warranties. conditions to set the codes again.
‘‘ CHECK FUEL CAP ’’ message on To check if they are set, turn the
the information display. Tighten the If your vehicle has an automatic ignition switch to the ON (II)
cap until it clicks at least once. transmission, the malfunction position, without starting the engine.
Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator lamp may also come on The malfunction indicator lamp will
indicator off immediately; it can take with the ‘‘ D ’’ indicator. come on for 20 seconds. If it then
several days of normal driving. goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 329).
304 2009 Fit

Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada However, if the brake pedal does not If the ABS indicator and the VSA
Brake System feel normal, you should take system indicator (if equipped) come
Indicator (Red) immediate action. A problem in one on with the brake system indicator,
part of the system's dual circuit have your vehicle inspected by your
The brake system indicator (red) design will still give you braking at dealer immediately.
normally comes on when you turn two wheels. You will feel the brake
the ignition switch to the ON (II) pedal go down much farther before
position, and as a reminder to check the vehicle begins to slow down, and
the parking brake. It will stay on if you will have to press harder on the
you do not fully release the parking pedal.
brake.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
If the brake system indicator (red) gear, and pull to the side of the road
comes on while driving, the brake when it is safe. Because of the long
fluid level is probably low. Press distance needed to stop, it is
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it hazardous to drive the vehicle. You

feels normal. If it does, check the should have it towed and repaired as
brake fluid level the next time you soon as possible (see Emergency
stop at a service station (see page Towing on page 311).
261).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
If the fluid level is low, take your distance in this condition, drive
vehicle to a dealer, and have the slowly and carefully.
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads/shoes.
2009 Fit 305

Fuses
INTERIOR INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD (On Battery)
FUSE LID FUSE LABEL

The vehicle's fuses are contained in The under-hood fuse box is on the
two fuse boxes. positive terminal of the battery.
The interior fuse box is behind the
fuse lid. To access it, pull the fuse lid
toward you.
306 2009 Fit

Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages 309 and 310, or the
diagram on the fuse label, which fuse
or fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works. BLOWN FUSE PULLER
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check all smaller fuses in the
headlights and all other the under-hood fuse box and the interior fuse box by pulling out
accessories are off. interior fuse box by looking each one with the fuse puller

through the top at the wire inside. provided in the interior fuse box.
2. On the under-hood fuse box,
remove the cover from the fuse
box. On the interior fuse box, pull
the fuse lid toward you.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 307

Fuses
BLOWN If you replace the blown fuse with a On vehicles without navigation system
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it If the radio fuse is removed, the
might blow out again. This does not audio system will disable itself. The
indicate anything wrong. Replace the next time you turn on the radio you
fuse with one of the correct rating as will see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in the
soon as you can. frequency display. Use the preset
191).
When the audio system is disabled,
Replacing a fuse with one that has a the clock setting in the audio system
higher rating greatly increases the will be canceled. You will need to
chances of damaging the electrical reset the clock (see page 192).
5. Look for a blown wire inside the system. If you do not have a
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with replacement fuse with the proper rating On vehicles with navigation system
one of the spare fuses of the same for the circuit, install one with a lower The navigation system will also
rating or lower. rating. disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
If you cannot drive the vehicle will require you to enter ‘‘ ENTER
without fixing the problem, and you 6. If the replacement fuse of the same CODE ’’ before it can be used. Refer
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse rating blows in a short time, there to the navigation system manual.
of the same rating or a lower rating is probably a serious electrical
from one of the other circuits. Make problem in your vehicle. Leave the
sure you can do without that circuit blown fuse in that circuit and have
temporarily (such as the accessory your vehicle checked by a
power socket or radio). qualified technician.
308 2009 Fit

Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 10 A Back Up 26 10 A LAF
2 (7.5 A) TPMSꭧ 27 (30 A) Door Lock Mainꭧ
3 20 A Driver's Power Window 28 20 A Headlight Main
4 － Not Used 29 10 A Small Light
5 10 A Back Up Light 30 30 A Main Fan Motor
6 10 A SRS 31 － Not Used
7 (10 A) Transmission SOLꭧ 32 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam
8 7.5 A SRS 33 15 A IG Coil
9 (20 A) Fog Lightꭧ 34 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam
10 7.5 A A/Cꭧ 35 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ
11 7.5 A ABS/VSAꭧ 36 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ
12 10 A ACG 37 30 A ABS/VSAꭧ FSR
13 20 A ACC Socket 38 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ
14 7.5 A Key Lock/Radio 39 15 A IGP
15 7.5 A Daytime Running Light 40 － Not Used
16 10 A Rear Wiper 41 － Not Used

17 20 A Front Passenger's Power 42 － Not Used
Window 43 (7.5 A) MG Clutch
18 20 A Rear Passenger's Side 44 7.5 A STS
Power Window
45 － Not Used
19 20 A Rear Driver's Side Power
Window 46 － Not Used
20 15 A Fuel Pump 47 (30 A) Sub Fan Motor
21 15 A Washer 48 10 A Left Headlight High Beam
22 7.5 A Meter 49 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ
23 10 A Hazard 50 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ
24 10 A Stop/Horn ꭧ: If equipped
25 － Not Used
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 309

Fuse Locations
No. Amps. Circuits Protected UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX Under-hood Fuse Box (On the battery)
51 10 A Right Headlight High Beam Amps. Circuits Protected
52 15 A DBW 100 A Battery
53 － Not Used 70 A EPS
54 20 A Rear Defoggerꭧ 20 A Horn/Hazard
55 10 A Heated Mirrorꭧ
56 30 A Front Wiper
57 30 A Blower Motor
58 30 A ABS/VSAꭧ Motor
59 20 A Rear Defogger
30 A
60 50 A/ IG Main/Option Main
40 A
61 30 A Radio
62 － Not Used
ꭧ: If equipped
310 2009 Fit

Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will
with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the
Manual transmission: above procedure exactly. If you cannot
dangerous.
●
Release the parking brake. shift the transmission or start the
There are two ways to tow your engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle: ●
Shift the transmission to neutral. vehicle must be transported with the
Flat-bed Equipment － The operator ●
Leave the ignition switch in the front wheels off the ground.
loads your vehicle on the back of a ACCESSORY (I) position so the
truck. This is the best way to steering wheel does not lock. With the front wheels on the ground,
transport your vehicle. it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
Automatic transmission:
Wheel-lift Equipment － The tow than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
● Release the parking brake. speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off Start the engine.

●
the ground. The rear tires remain on ● Shift to D position and hold for 5
the ground. This is an acceptable
seconds, then to N. Let the engine
way to tow your vehicle.
run for 3 minutes, then turn it off.
●
Turn off the engine.
●
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 311

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the mud, or snow, call a towing service to
bumpers will cause serious damage. pull it out (see page 311).
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle's weight. For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.
The steering system can be damaged if

the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) To use the towing hook:
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin 1. Take the towing hook and the
towing. extension out of the tool kit in the
cargo area.
2. Put a cloth on the notch of the
cover. Using the extension,
carefully pry on the notch of the
cover to remove it.
312 2009 Fit

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the towing hook for straight, flat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a flat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
3. Screw the towing hook into the

bolt hole behind the bumper, then
tighten the hook securely with the

extension.
2009 Fit 313

314 2009 Fit

Main Menu
The diagrams in this section give you Identification Numbers ............... 316 Emissions Testing....................... 329
the dimensions and capacities of Specifications .............................. 318
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.
identification numbers. It also Vehicles) ............................. 321
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality
know about your vehicle's tires and Grading ............................... 321
emissions control systems. Treadwear ............................... 321
Traction .................................. 321
Temperature ........................... 322
Tire Labeling .............................. 323
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) － Required Federal
Explanation ......................... 324
Emissions Controls ..................... 326
The Clean Air Act.................... 326
Crankcase Emissions Control
System ................................ 326
Evaporative Emissions Control
System ................................ 326
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ............................. 326
Exhaust Emissions Controls ... 327
Replacement Parts .................. 327
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 328
2009 Fit 315

Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver's side. It is
also on the certification label COVER
attached to the driver's doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
The VIN is also located on the
engine bulkhead. Slide the cover on
the engine compartment bulkhead to
view the VIN. Always close the cover
when finished.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
316 2009 Fit

Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

the front of the engine block.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
ENGINE NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
2009 Fit 317
Specifications
Dimensions Engine
Length 161.6 in (4,105 mm) Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
Width 66.7 in (1,695 mm) i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
Height 60.0 in (1,525 mm) Bore x Stroke 2.87 x 3.52 in
(73.0 x 89.4 mm)
Wheelbase 98.4 in (2,500 mm)
Displacement 91.3 cu-in (1,497 cm3)
Track Front 58.7 in (1,492 mm)ꭧ1
58.1 in (1,476 mm)ꭧ2 Compression ratio 10.4 : 1
Rear 58.1 in (1,475mm) ꭧ1 Spark plugs IZFR6K13 (NGK)
57.4 in (1,459 mm)ꭧ2 SKJ20DR-M13 (DENSO)
ꭧ1: All models except Sport
ꭧ2: Sport model
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver's doorjamb.
Seating Capacities
Total 5
Front 2
Rear 3
318 2009 Fit

Specifications
Capacities Air Conditioning

Fuel tank Approx. Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a)
10.6 US gal (40 L) Charge quantity 13.1 － 14.8 oz
Engine oil Changeꭧ1 (370 －420 g)
Including 3.8 US qt (3.6 L) Lubricant type SP-10
filter
Without filter 3.6 US qt (3.4 L) Lights
Total 4.4 US qt (4.2 L) Headlights High/Low 12 V － 60/55W (HB2)
Engine Automatic Front turn signal lights 12 V － 21W (Amber)
coolant transmission
Parking lights/side marker 12 V － 3.8W (Amber)
Changeꭧ2 1.19 US gal (4.5 L)
lights
Total 1.32 US gal (5.0 L)
Fog lightsꭧ 12 V － 55W (H11)
Manual transmission
Rear turn signal lights 12 V － 21W (Amber)
Changeꭧ2 1.16 US gal (4.4 L)
Stop/Taillights 12 V － 21/5W
Total 1.29 US gal (4.9 L)
Automatic Change 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Back-up lights 12 V － 16W
transmission Total 6.18 US qt (5.85 L) License plate lights 12 V － 5W
fluid 12 V － 8W
Ceiling light
Manual Change 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)
Cargo area light 12 V － 5W
transmisson fluid Total 1.7 US qt (1.6 L)
Map lightꭧ 12 V － 8W
Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
washer reservoir High-mount brake light LED
Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
ꭧ: For some types
ꭧ1: Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
ꭧ2: Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.116 US gal (0.44 L)
2009 Fit 319

Specifications
Battery Tires
Capacity 12 V － 32 AH/5 HR Size Front/Rear 175/65R15 84Sꭧ1
12 V － 34 AH/5 HR 185/55R16 83Hꭧ2
12 V － 40 AH/20 HR Spare T125/70D15 95Mꭧ3
Fuses T135/80D15 99Mꭧ4
Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa,
Interior See page 309 or the fuse label
2.2 kgf/cm2)ꭧ1
attached to the dashboard.
33 psi (230 kPa,
Under-hood See page 310 or the fuse box cover.
2.3 kgf/cm2)ꭧ2
Alignment Spare 60 psi (420 kPa,
Toe-in Front 0.0 in (0 mm) 4.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear 0.10 in (2.5 mm) ꭧ1: All models except Sport
Camber Front 0° ꭧ2: Sport model
Rear －1° ꭧ3: On models without VSA system and all Canadian models with
Caster Front 3°20' manual transmission
ꭧ4: On models with VSA system
320 2009 Fit

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for comparative rating based on the wear lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature rate of the tire when tested under grades represent the tire's ability to
performance according to controlled conditions on a specified stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation (DOT) government test course. For under controlled conditions on
standards. The following explains example, a tire graded 150 would specified government test surfaces of
these gradings. wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
Uniform Tire Quality Grading as well on the government course as C may have poor traction
Quality grades can be found where a tire graded 100. The relative performance.
applicable on the tire sidewall performance of tires depends upon
Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and the actual conditions of their use,
assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For however, and may depart
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: significantly from the norm due to
and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 variations in driving habits, service
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA practices and differences in road
traction characteristics.
characteristics and climate.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
2009 Fit 321

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire's resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
322 2009 Fit

Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
have a number of markings. Those Whenever tires are replaced, they The tire identification number (TIN)
you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the is a group of numbers and letters that
below. same size. Below is an example of look like the following example. TIN
tire size with an explanation of what is located on the sidewall of the tire.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE each component means.
(1) DOT B97R FW6X 2202
185/55R16 83H DOT － This indicates that the tire
185 － Tire width in millimeters. meets all requirements of
55 － Aspect ratio (the tire's the U.S. Department of
section height as a Transportation.
percentage of its width). B97R － Manufacturer's
R － Tire construction code (R identification mark.
indicates radial). FW6X － Tire type code.
16 － Rim diameter in inches. 2202 － Date of manufacture.
83 － Load index (a numerical code Year
associated with the Week
maximum load the tire can
carry).
(4) (1)
H － Speed symbol (an
(3) (2) alphabetical code indicating
(1) Tire Size the maximum speed rating).
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 323

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation
Maximum Tire Pressure As an added safety feature, your Driving on a significantly under-
Max Press － The maximum air vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflated tire causes the tire to
pressure the tire can hold. pressure monitoring system (TPMS) overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Maximum Tire Load that illuminates a low tire pressure Under-inflation also reduces fuel
Max Load － The maximum load the telltale efficiency and tire tread life, and may
tire can carry at maximum air affect the vehicle's handling and
pressure. stopping ability.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System when one or more of your tires is Please note that the TPMS is not a
(TPMS) － Required Federal significantly under-inflated. substitute for proper tire
Explanation maintenance, and it is the driver's
U.S. models only Accordingly, when the low tire responsibility to maintain correct tire
Each tire, including the spare (if pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
provided), should be checked should stop and check your tires as not reached the level to trigger
monthly when cold and inflated to soon as possible, and inflate them to illumination of the TPMS low tire
the inflation pressure recommended the proper pressure. pressure telltale.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
324 2009 Fit

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to telltale after replacing one or more
indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to
operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or
malfunction indicator is provided by alternate tires and wheels allow the
a separate telltale, which displays the TPMS to continue to function
symbol ‘‘ TPMS ’’ when illuminated. properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
2009 Fit 325

Emissions Controls
ꭧ
The burning of gasoline in your In Canada, Honda vehicles comply Evaporative Emissions Control
vehicle's engine produces several with the Canadian emission System
byproducts. Some of these are requirements, as specified in an As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of agreement with Environment tank, an evaporative emissions
nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons Canada, at the time they are control canister filled with charcoal
(HC). Gasoline evaporating from the manufactured. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
tank also produces hydrocarbons. Crankcase Emissions Control canister while the engine is off. After
Controlling the production of NOx, System the engine is started and warmed up,
CO, and HC is important to the Your vehicle has a positive crankcase the vapor is drawn into the engine
environment. Under certain ventilation system. This keeps and burned during driving.
conditions of sunlight and climate, gasses that build up in the engine's Onboard Refueling Vapor
NOx and HC react to form crankcase from going into the Recovery
photochemical ‘‘ smog. ’’ Carbon atmosphere. The positive crankcase The onboard refueling vapor
monoxide does not contribute to ventilation valve routes them from recovery (ORVR) system captures
smog creation, but it is a poisonous the crankcase back to the intake the fuel vapors during refueling. The
gas. manifold. They are then drawn into vapors are adsorbed in a canister
The Clean Air Act the engine and burned. filled with activated carbon. While
The United States Clean Air Actꭧ driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
sets standards for automobile into the engine and burned off.
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
326 2009 Fit

Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter

The exhaust emissions controls The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is
include four systems: PGM-FI, multiport fuel injection. It has three in the exhaust system. Through
ignition timing control, exhaust gas subsystems: air intake, engine chemical reactions, it converts HC,
recirculation, and three way catalytic control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaust
converter. These four systems work powertrain control module (PCM) in to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
together to control the engine's automatic transmission vehicles or (N2), and water vapor.
combustion and minimize the the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses Replacement Parts
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that The emissions control systems are
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It designed and certified to work
emissions control systems are together in reducing emissions to
separate from the crankcase and then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions. levels that comply with the Clean Air
evaporative emissions control Act. To make sure the emissions
systems. Ignition Timing Control System remain low, you should use only new
This system constantly adjusts the
Honda replacement parts or their
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced. equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) emissions from your vehicle.
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) The emissions control systems are
system takes some of the exhaust gas covered by warranties separate from
and routes it back into the intake the rest of your vehicle. Read your
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the warranty manual for more
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount information.
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
2009 Fit 327

Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter ● Keep the engine well maintained.
contains precious metals that serve ● Have your vehicle diagnosed and
as catalysts, promoting chemical
repaired if it is misfiring,
reactions to convert the exhaust
backfiring, stalling, or otherwise
gasses without affecting the metals.
not running properly.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine's
near it. Park your vehicle away from performance. Follow these
high grass, dry leaves, or other guidelines to protect your vehicle's
flammables. three way catalytic converter.
● Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
328 2009 Fit

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
5. Keep the vehicle in Park
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the
(automatic transmission) or
This is because of certain ‘‘ readiness next two or three days, you can
neutral (manual transmission).
codes ’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following.
rpm, and hold it there until the
systems. These codes are erased
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly, temperature gauge rises to at least
when the battery is disconnected,
but not completely, full (around 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
and set again only after several days
3/4).
of driving under a variety of 6. Without touching the accelerator
conditions. 2. Make sure the vehicle has been pedal, let the engine idle for 20
parked with the engine off for 6 seconds.
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
CONTINUED
2009 Fit 329

Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban traffic

major highway where you can for at least 10 minutes. When
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph traffic conditions allow, let the
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 vehicle coast for several seconds
minutes. Drive on the highway in without using the accelerator pedal
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do or the brake pedal.
not use the cruise control. When
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
parked with the engine off for 30
without moving the accelerator
minutes.
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot If the testing facility determines the
do this for a continuous 90 readiness codes are still not set, see
seconds because of traffic your dealer.
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
330 2009 Fit

Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information .... 332

Warranty Coverages ................... 333
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Vehicles) .................................

334
Authorized Manuals .................... 335
2009 Fit 331

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Customer Relations us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue ● Vehicle Identification Number (see
If you encounter a problem that your Toronto, ON page 316)
dealership does not solve to your M1B 2K8
satisfaction, please discuss it with the ●
Name and address of the dealer
dealership's management. The Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 who services your vehicle
service manager or general manager Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776 ●
Date of purchase
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way. In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin ●
Mileage on your vehicle
If you are dissatisfied with the Islands: ● Your name, address, and
Bella International
decision made by the dealership's P.O. Box 190816 telephone number
management, contact Honda San Juan, PR 00919-0816 ● A detailed description of the
Customer Service. problem
Tel: (787) 620-7546
U.S. Owners: ● Name of the dealer who sold the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service vehicle to you
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
332 2009 Fit

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty － a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty － provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. Please coverage for a replacement battery
read your warranty booklet for purchased from your dealer.

New Vehicle Limited Warranty －
details.
covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty － Limited Warranty － provides
systems, and accessories against all exterior body panels are covered coverage for as long as the purchaser
defects in materials and for rust-through from the inside for of the muffler owns the vehicle.
workmanship. the specified time period with no
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
mileage limit.
Emissions Control Systems Defects all these warranties. Please read the
Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty － 2009 Honda warranty information
Performance Warranty － these two Honda accessories are covered booklet that came with your vehicle
warranties cover your vehicle's under this warranty. Time and for precise information on warranty
emissions control systems. Time, mileage limits depend on the type of coverages. Your vehicle's original
mileage, and coverage are accessory and other factors. Please tires are covered by their
conditional. Please read your read your warranty booklet for manufacturer. Tire warranty
warranty booklet for exact details. information is in a separate booklet.
information.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty Canadian Owners
Original Equipment Battery Limited － covers all Honda replacement Please refer to the 2009 warranty
Warranty － this warranty gives up to parts against defects in materials and manual that came with your vehicle.
100% credit toward a replacement workmanship.
battery.
2009 Fit 333

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or complaints, it may open an Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you investigation, and if it finds that a 1-888-327-4236
should immediately inform the safety defect exists in a group of (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go to
National Highway Traffic Safety vehicles, it may order a recall and http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administration (NHTSA) in addition remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
to notifying American Honda Motor cannot become involved in individual Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
Co., Inc. problems between you, your dealer, 20590. You can also obtain other
or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
334 2009 Fit

Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough

●
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
● Go online at www. helminc. com
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
at 1-800-782-4356.
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in
Publication Form Description your vehicle.
Form Number
Body Repair Manual:
61TK600 2009 Honda Fit Service Manual Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
61TK600EL 2009 Honda Fit of damaged body parts.
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
61TK630 2009 Honda Fit Body Repair Manual
31TK6600 2009 Honda Fit Owner's Manual
31TK6800 2009 Honda Fit Navigation System Owner's Manual
31TK6M00 2009 Honda Fit Honda Service History
31TK6Q00 2009 Honda Fit Quick Start Guide
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
2009 Fit 335

336 2009 Fit

Main Menu
Index
A Auto Control Mode, Starting Jump Starting .......................... 299

Engine .................................... 216 Maintenance ........................... 279
AAA Auto Door Locking ....................... 83 Specifications .......................... 320
BBB ~CCC ................................. 3 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .... 83 Before Driving ........................... 197
Accessories and Auto Door Unlocking ................... 85 Belts, Seat ................................ 8, 18
Modifications .......................... 206 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ... 20 Beverage Holders ...................... 106
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Automatic Speed Control ........... 194 Booster Seats ............................... 50
Position) ................................... 80 Automatic Transmission ............ 219 Brakes
Accessory Power Socket ............ 106 Capacity, Fluid ........................ 319 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ........... 231
Additives, Engine Oil ................. 254 Checking Fluid Level .............. 259 Break-in, New Linings ............. 198
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...... 77 Paddle Shifters ........................ 224 Bulb Replacement ................... 266
Advanced Airbags ........................ 27 Shifting ................................... 219 Fluid ....................................... 261
Airbag (SRS) ............................ 9, 22 Shift Lever Position Parking ................................... 102
Air Conditioning System ............ 110 Indicators ............................ 219 System Design ........................ 230
Usage ...................................... 111 Shift Lever Positions ............... 220 System Indicator ............... 60, 305
Air Pressure, Tires .............. 273, 274 Shift Lock Release ................... 223 Wear Indicators ....................... 230
Alcohol in Gasoline .................... 198 Automatic Transmission Fluid ... 259 Braking System .......................... 230
Antifreeze ................................... 256 Auxiliary Input Jack ................... 190 Break-in, New Vehicle ................ 198
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Average Fuel Mileage .................. 70 Brightness Control,
INDEX
Indicator Light .................. 62, 231 Instruments .............................. 76
Operation ................................ 231 B
Anti-theft, Audio System ............. 191
Anti-theft Steering Column Battery
Lock ......................................... 80 Charging System
Audio System ............................. 115 Indicator ........................ 60, 303
CONTINUED
2009 Fit I
Main Menu
Index
Bulb Replacement CD Player ........................... 122, 149 Tether Anchorage Points ......... 47
Back-up Lights ........................ 266 Certification Label ...................... 316 Cleaning the Seat Belts .............. 267
Brake Lights ........................... 266 Chains, Tires .............................. 278 Clock .......................................... 192
Fog Lights ............................... 265 Changing a Flat Tire .................. 285 Clutch Fluid ............................... 261
Front Parking Lights ............... 263 Changing Oil Code, Audio System ................... 191
Front Side Marker Lights ........ 263 How to .................................... 254 CO in the Exhaust ................ 53, 326
Headlights .............................. 262 When to .................................. 245 Cold Weather, Starting in ........... 216
Rear Bulbs .............................. 266 Charging System Compact Spare Tire .................... 284
Specifications .......................... 319 Indicator ........................... 60, 303 Consumer Information (U.S.
Taillights ................................. 266 Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............. 70 only) ....................................... 332
Turn Signal Lights .......... 263, 266 Checklist, Before Driving ........... 215 Controls, Instruments and ............ 57
Bulbs, Halogen .......................... 262 Childproof Door Locks ................. 82 Coolant
Child Safety .................................. 34 Adding .................................... 256
Booster Seats ........................... 50 Checking ................................ 202
C Child Seats .......................... 39, 41 Proper Solution ....................... 256
Important Safety Reminders ..... 38 Temperature Indicator ............. 63
Cancel Button ............................ 196 Infants ...................................... 39 Crankcase Emissions Control
Capacities Chart ......................... 318 Large Children ......................... 49 System ................................... 326
Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............ 53 LATCH ..................................... 43 Cruise Control Indicator ............... 65
Cargo ......................................... 208 Risks with Airbags ................... 35 Cruise Control Operation ........... 194
Cargo Hook ................................ 212 Small Children ......................... 40 Cup Holders ............................... 106
Cargo, How to Carry .................. 208 Tethers .................................... 47 Current Fuel Mileage ................... 70
Carrying Cargo .......................... 208 Warning Labels ........................ 36 Customer Service Office ............ 332
CAUTION, Explanation of ............ iii Where Should a Child Sit? ........ 35
CD Care ..................................... 186 Child Seats ............................. 34, 41
CD Error Messages ............ 128, 157 LATCH Anchorage Points ........ 43
II 2009 Fit
Main Menu
Index
D Doors Charging System Indicator ..... 303

Childproof Door Locks ............. 82 Checking the Fuses ................ 307
DANGER, Explanation of ............. iii Locking and Unlocking ............ 81 Driving with a Flat Tire ........... 284
Dashboard ............................... 3, 58 Power Door Locks ................... 81 Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 76
Daytime Running Lights (Canada DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Jump Starting .......................... 299
only) ......................................... 75 Vehicles) ................................ 321 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ..... 303
Daytime Running Lights Indicator Downshifting, Manual Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 304
(Canada only) ........................... 65 Transmission .......................... 217 Overheated Engine ................. 301
Dead Battery .............................. 299 Driver and Passenger Safety .......... 5 Towing .................................... 311
Defects, Reporting Safety ........... 334 Driving ....................................... 213 Emergency Brake ...................... 102
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 76 Economy ................................. 203 Emergency Flashers .................... 76
Defrosting the Windows ............ 113 Driving Guidelines ..................... 214 Emergency Towing .................... 311
Detachable Anchor ...................... 99 Driving with the Paddle Shifters Emissions Controls .................... 326
Dimensions ................................ 318 (Sport only) ............................ 224 Emissions Testing ...................... 329
Dimming the Headlights .............. 74 Dust and Pollen Filter ................ 268
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission ......... 259 E
Engine Oil ............................... 201
Directional Signals ....................... 63
INDEX
Economy, Fuel ........................... 203
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ....... 230 Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Disc Care ................................... 186 Indicator ................................... 62
Disc Player Error Emergencies on the Road .......... 283
Messages ........................ 128, 157 Battery, Jump Starting ............. 299
Disposal of Used Oil ................... 255 Brake System Indicator ........... 305
Changing a Flat Tire ............... 285
CONTINUED
2009 Fit III
Main Menu
Index
Engine Features, Comfort and Octane Requirement ............... 198

Adding Engine Coolant ........... 256 Convenience ........................... 109 Oxygenated ............................. 198
Coolant Temperature Filling the Fuel Tank .................. 199 Reserve Indicator ..................... 62
Indicator ............................... 63 Filters Tank, Filling the ...................... 199
If it Won’t Start ........................ 297 Dust and Pollen ....................... 268 Fuel Economy ............................ 203
Malfunction Indicator Oil ........................................... 254 Fuses, Checking the .................. 307
Lamp ............................. 60, 304 Flashers, Hazard Warning ........... 76
Oil Life Indicator ..................... 245 Flat Tire, Changing a ................. 285
Oil Pressure Indicator ....... 60, 303 Floor Mats ................................. 267 G
Oil, What Kind to Use ............. 253 Fluids
Overheating ............................ 301 Automatic Transmission ......... 259 Gas Mileage, Improving ............. 203
Specifications .......................... 318 Brake ...................................... 261 Gasohol ...................................... 198
Speed Limiter .................. 218, 222 Clutch ..................................... 261 Gasoline ..................................... 198
Starting ................................... 216 Manual Transmission .............. 260 Gauge ...................................... 68
Ethanol in Gasoline .................... 198 Windshield Washer ................. 258 Low Fuel Indicator ................... 62
Evaporative Emissions FM/AM Radio Reception ........... 184 Octane Requirement ............... 198
Controls .................................. 326 Four-way Flashers ........................ 76 Tank, Refueling ....................... 199
Exhaust Fumes ............................ 53 Front Airbags ........................... 9, 25 Gas Station Procedures .............. 199
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Front Seat Gauges
Belts by .................................... 16 Adjusting .................................. 93 Fuel .......................................... 70
Airbags ................................. 9, 25 Speedometer ............................ 68
Fuel ............................................ 198 Gearshift Lever Positions
F Check Fuel Cap Indicator ......... 70 Automatic Transmission ......... 220
Fill Door and Cap .................... 199 Manual Transmission .............. 217
Fan, Interior ............................... 111 Gauge ...................................... 70 Glove Box .................................. 105
Low Fuel Indicator ................... 62
IV 2009 Fit
Main Menu
Index
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Horn ............................................ 72 Fog Lights ................................ 64

(GVWR) ................................. 209 Hydraulic Clutch ........................ 261 High Beam ............................... 65
High Temperature ................... 63
Key (Immobilizer System) ....... 66
H I Lights On ................................. 64
Low Fuel .................................. 62
Halogen Headlight Bulbs ........... 262 Identification Number, Low Oil Pressure .............. 60, 303
Hazard Warning Flashers ............ 76 Vehicle ................................... 316 Low Temperature ..................... 63
Headlights ............................. 74, 75 Ignition Low Tire Pressure (U.S.
Aiming .................................... 262 Keys ......................................... 78 only) .............................. 64, 235
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Switch ...................................... 80 Maintenance Minder ......... 66, 245
only) ..................................... 75 Timing Control System ........... 327 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 304
High Beam Indicator ................ 65 Immobilizer System ..................... 79 Passenger Airbag Off ............... 31
High Beams, Turning on .......... 74 Important Safety Precautions ......... 6 Seat Belt Reminder ............. 18, 60
Lights On Indicator .................. 64 Indicators, Instrument Panel ........ 59 Security System ....................... 66
Low Beams, Turning on ........... 74 ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ....... 62, 231 Side Airbag Off ......................... 61
Reminder Chime ...................... 75 Brake (Parking and Brake SRS ..................................... 30, 61
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ........ 262 System) ......................... 60, 305 TPMS (U.S. only) .............. 64, 236
Turning on ............................... 74 Charging System .............. 60, 303 Turn Signal and Hazard
INDEX
Head Restraints ............................ 94 Check Fuel Cap ....................... 70 Warning ............................... 63
Heated Mirror ............................ 102 Cruise Control .......................... 65 VSA System ............................. 67
Heating and Cooling .................. 110 Cruise Main ............................. 65 Washer Level ........................... 65
High Beam Lever ......................... 75 Door and Tailgate Open ........... 62 Infant Restraint ............................ 39
High-Low Beam Switch ................ 74 DRL (Daytime Running Lights) Infant Seats .................................. 39
Hood, Opening and Closing (Canada only) ....................... 65 Tether Anchorage Point ........... 47
the .......................................... 200 Electric Power Steering ............ 62
CONTINUED
2009 Fit V
Main Menu
Index
Inflation, Proper Tire .................. 273 L Low Oil Pressure

Recommended Pressures ....... 274 Indicator ........................... 60, 303
Inside Mirror ............................. 101 Label, Certification ..................... 316 Lubricant Specifications Chart ... 319
Inspection, Tire .......................... 275 Lane Change, Signaling ............... 74 Luggage, Storing (cargo) ........... 208
Installing a Child Seat .................. 42 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19
Instrument Panel .......................... 59 LATCH Anchorage System .......... 43
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 76 M
Lights
Instruments and Controls ............. 57 Bulb Replacement ................... 262
Interior Lights ............................ 107 Maintenance .............................. 243
Indicator ................................... 59 Main Items and Sub Items ...... 248
Introduction ................................... i Interior .................................... 107
iPod® Error Messages ......... 135, 176 Minder .................................... 245
Parking .................................... 74 Minder Indicator ...................... 66
Turn Signal .............................. 74 Owner's Maintenance
J Load Limit .................................. 209 Checks ................................ 250
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ...... 80 Safety ...................................... 244
Jacking up the Vehicle ............... 285 Locks Schedule ................................. 251
Jack, Tire ................................... 285 Anti-theft Steering Column ....... 80 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ....... 304
Jump Starting ............................. 299 Childproof Door ....................... 82 Manual Transmission ................. 217
Fuel Fill Door .......................... 199 Checking Fluid Level .............. 260
Lockout Prevention .................. 82 Shifting ................................... 217
K Power Door .............................. 81 Manual Transmission Fluid ....... 260
Tailgate .................................... 88 Meters, Gauges ............................ 68
Keys ............................................. 78 Low Coolant Level ...................... 202 Methanol in Gasoline ................. 198
Lower Anchors ............................. 43 Mirrors, Adjusting ...................... 101
Lower Glove Box ........................ 105 Modifications ............................. 207
Low Fuel Indicator ....................... 62 Modifying Your Vehicle ............. 207
VI 2009 Fit
Main Menu
Index
N Owner's Maintenance Checks .... 250 Power Door Locks ....................... 81

Oxygenated Fuels ...................... 198 Power Socket Locations ............. 106
Neutral Gear Position ................. 221 Power Windows ......................... 100
New Vehicle Break-in ................. 198 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts ........ 16
P Preparing to Drive ...................... 215
Normal Shift Speeds .................. 218
NOTICE, Explanation of ................ i Protecting Adults and Teens ........ 11
Paddle Shifters ........................... 224 Additional Safety Precautions ... 17
Numbers, Identification ............. 316 Panel Brightness Control ............. 76 Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16
Park Gear Position ..................... 220 Protecting Children ...................... 34
O Parking ...................................... 229 General Guidelines .................. 34
Parking Brake ............................ 102 Protecting Infants ..................... 39
Odometer ..................................... 70 Parking Brake and Brake System Protecting Larger Children ...... 49
Odometer, Trip ............................ 69 Indicator ........................... 60, 305 Protecting Small Children ........ 40
Oil Parking Lights ............................. 74 Using Child Seats with
Change, How to ...................... 254 Parking Over Things that Tethers ................................. 47
Change, When to .................... 245 Burn ................................ 229, 328 Using LATCH .......................... 43
Checking Engine .................... 201 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .... 31
Life, Engine ............................. 245 PGM-FI System .......................... 327
Pressure Indicator ............. 60, 303 Playing a Disc ..................... 122, 149 R
INDEX
Selecting Proper Viscosity Playing an iPod® .................. 129, 170
Chart ................................... 253 Playing a PC card ....................... 158 Radiator Overheating ................. 301
Onboard Refueling Vapor Playing a USB Flash Memory Radio/CD Sound System ........... 115
Recovery ................................ 326 Device ............................. 136, 177 Radio Theft Protection ............... 191
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 80 Playing the AM/FM Radio ......... 143 Readiness Codes ........................ 329
Outside Mirrors ......................... 101 Playing the FM/AM Radio ......... 115 Rear Lights, Bulb
Overheating, Engine .................. 301 Pollen Filter ............................... 268 Replacement ........................... 266
CONTINUED
2009 Fit VII
Main Menu
Index
Rear View Mirror ....................... 101 Rotation, Tire ............................. 276 Reminder Indicator and
Rear Window Defogger ................ 76 Beeper ............................. 18, 60
Rear Window Wiper and System Components ................ 18
Washer ..................................... 73 S Use During Pregnancy ............. 16
Recommended Shift Speeds ....... 218 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder
Refueling .................................... 199 Safety Belts .............................. 8, 18 Belt .................................. 14, 19
Reminder Indicators ..................... 60 Safety Defects, Reporting (U.S. Seats ............................................ 93
Remote Audio Controls .............. 189 only) ....................................... 334 Seats, Adjusting the ..................... 93
Remote Transmitter ..................... 90 Safety Features .............................. 7 Seat Under Box .......................... 106
Replacement Information Airbags ...................................... 9 Security System ......................... 193
Dust and Pollen Filter ............. 268 Door Locks .............................. 11 Sensors
Engine Oil and Filter ............... 254 Head Restraints ........................ 13 Driver's Seat Position Sensor ... 27
Fuses ...................................... 306 Seat Belts .............................. 8, 14 Front Passenger's Weight
Light Bulbs ............................. 262 Seats & Seat-Backs .............. 11, 12 Sensors ................................ 27
Schedule ................................. 251 Safety Labels, Location of ............. 54 Impact Sensors ................... 22, 23
Tires ....................................... 276 Safety Messages .......................... iii Serial Number ............................ 316
Wiper Blades .......................... 269 Seat Belts ................................. 8, 18 Service Intervals ......................... 245
Replacing Seat Belts After a Additional Information ............. 18 Service Manual (U.S. only) ........ 335
Crash ........................................ 20 Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16 Service Station Procedures ........ 199
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Automatic Seat Belt Setting the Clock ........................ 192
Vehicles) ................................ 334 Tensioners ........................... 20 Shifting the Automatic
Reserve Tank, Engine Cleaning .................................. 267 Transmission .......................... 219
Coolant ............................ 202, 256 Detachable Anchor .................. 99 Shift Lever Position Indicators ... 219
Restraint, Child ............................ 34 Lap/Shoulder Belt .............. 14, 19 Shift Lock Release ...................... 223
Reverse Gear Position ................ 221 Maintenance ............................ 20
Reverse Lockout ........................ 223
VIII 2009 Fit

Main Menu
Index
Side Airbags ................................. 28 How the SRS Indicator Works .. 30 System Components ................ 22
How the Side Airbag Off How Your Front Airbags Synthetic Oil .............................. 254
Indicator Works ................... 31 Works .................................. 25
How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28 How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28
Off Indicator ............................. 31 How Your Side Curtain Airbags T
Side Curtain Airbags .................... 30 Work .................................... 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags SRS Indicator ......................... 30, 61 Tachometer .................................. 68
Work .................................... 30 START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 80 Tailgate ........................................ 88
Side Marker Lights, Bulb Starting the Engine .................... 216 Open Indicator ......................... 62
Replacement in ....................... 263 In Cold Weather at High Opening the ............................. 88
Signaling Turns ............................ 63 Altitude ................................ 216 Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ..... 266
Snow Tires ................................. 278 With a Dead Battery ................ 299 Taking Care of the
Sound System ............................ 115 State Emissions Testing ............. 329 Unexpected ............................ 283
Spare Tire .................................. 284 Steam Coming from Engine ....... 301 Technical Descriptions
Inflating ........................... 273, 284 Steering Wheel DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.
Spark Plugs ................................ 318 Adjustment ............................... 77 Vehicles) ............................. 321
Specifications ............................. 318 Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 80 Emissions Control Systems ..... 326
Speed Control ............................ 194 Buttons ................................... 189 Three Way Catalytic
Speed Limiter ...................... 218, 222 Steering Wheel Buttons ............. 194 Converter ............................ 328
INDEX
Speedometer ................................ 68 Stereo Sound System ................. 115 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
SRS, Additional Information ......... 22 Storing Your Vehicle .................. 281 (TPMS) － Required Federal
Additional Safety Precautions ... 33 Sun Visor ................................... 106 Explanation ...................... 324
Airbag Service .......................... 32 Supplemental Restraint Temperature Indicator ................. 63
Airbag System Components ..... 22 System .............................. 9, 22 Temporarily Repairing a Flat
How the Side Airbag Off Servicing .................................. 32 Tire ........................................ 291
Indicator Works ................... 31 SRS Indicator ...................... 30, 61 Tensioners, Seat Belts .................. 20
CONTINUED
2009 Fit IX
Main Menu
Index
Tether Anchorage Points ............. 47 Pressure Monitoring System Turn Signals ................................. 63
Theft Protection, Radio .............. 191 (U.S. only) ........................... 235
Three Way Catalytic Replacing ................................ 276
Converter ............................... 328 Rotating .................................. 276 U
Tilt the Steering Wheel ................ 77 Snow ....................................... 278
Time, Setting the ........................ 192 Specifications .......................... 320 Unexpected, Taking Care of
Tire Chains ................................ 278 Tools, Tire Changing ................. 285 the .......................................... 283
Tire, How to Change a Flat ........ 285 Towing Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Information ......................... 323 A Trailer .................................. 238 (U.S. only) .............................. 321
Tire Labeling .............................. 323 Emergency Wrecker ............... 311 Unleaded Gasoline ..................... 198
Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Upper Glove Box ........................ 105
(TPMS) ........................... 235, 324 System) (U.S. only) ............ 235 USB Flash Memory Device Error
Tires .......................................... 273 Indicator (U.S.only) ........... 64, 236 Messages ........................ 142, 183
Air Pressure ............................ 274 Required Federal Used Oil, How to Dispose of ...... 255
Chains ..................................... 278 Explanation ......................... 324
Checking Wear ....................... 275 Transmission V
Compact Spare ........................ 284 Checking Fluid Level,
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Automatic ............................ 259 Vehicle Capacity Load ................ 209
Vehicles) ............................. 321 Checking Fluid Level, Vehicle Dimensions ................... 318
Inflation ................................... 273 Manual ................................ 260 Vehicle Identification Number ... 316
Inspection ............................... 275 Fluid Selection ................ 259, 260 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®),
Labeling .................................. 323 Identification Number ............. 316 aka Electronic Stability
Low Tire Pressure Indicator Shifting the Automatic ............. 219 Control (ESC), System .... 233
(U.S. only) ..................... 64, 235 Shifting the Manual ................. 217 VSA System Indicator .............. 67
Maintenance ........................... 276 Treadwear .................................. 321 Vehicle Storage .......................... 281
Trip Meter ................................... 69
X 2009 Fit
Main Menu
Index
Ventilation .................................. 112 Windshield

VIN ............................................ 316 Cleaning ................................... 73
Viscosity, Oil .............................. 253 Defroster ................................. 113
Washers ............................ 73, 258
Wipers, Windshield
W Changing Blades ..................... 269
Operation ................................. 73
WARNING, Explanation of ........... iii Worn Tires ................................. 275
Warning Labels, Location of ......... 54 Wrecker, Emergency Towing .... 311
Warranty Coverages (U.S.
only) ....................................... 333
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ........ 258
Fluid Level Indicator (Canada
only) ..................................... 65
Operation ................................. 73
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 77
Alignment and Balance ........... 276
INDEX
Compact Spare ........................ 284
Wrench, Nut ........................... 285
Windows
Auto Down .............................. 101
Auto Reverse ........................... 101
Operating the Power ............... 100
Rear, Defogger ......................... 76
2009 Fit XI
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Manual Transmission Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
number of 87 or higher. preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 or DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
10W-40 motor oil as a temporary DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Fuel Tank Capacity:
replacement (see page 260). replacement (see page 261).
10.6 US gal (40 L)
Capacity (including differential): Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Recommended Engine Oil:
1.6 US qt (1.5 L) Front/Rear:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 253). All models except Sport
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Oil change capacity (including
filter): Sport model
3.8 US qt (3.6 L) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Automatic Transmission Fluid: Spare Tire Pressure:
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
(Automatic Transmission Fluid)
(see page 259).
2009 Fit
Main Menu
Owner's Identification
OWNER _________________________________________________________ This owner's manual should be considered a

permanent part of the vehicle and should
______________________________________________________________________________ remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS _______________________________________________________ This owner's manual covers all models of the

Fit. You may find descriptions of equipment
STREET and features that are not on your particular
vehicle.
_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________
The information and specifications included
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
in this publication were in effect at the time of
POSTAL CODE approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
V. I. N. ___________________________________________________________ reserves the right, however, to discontinue or
change specifications or design at any time
DELIVERY DATE __________________________________________________ without notice and without incurring any
obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME ___________________ DEALER NO. ___________________
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVIS
ADDRESS _______________________________________________________ IMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin d'un
Manuel du Conducteur en français,
STREET veuillez demander à votre
concessionnaire de commander le
_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________ numéro de pièce 33TK6C00
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________
DEALER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________
2009 Fit

Manual Honda Fit PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Honda Fit PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Main Menu

California Proposition 65 Warning

A Few Words About Safety

2009 Fit iii

Owner's Identification Form

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer Relations

Your Vehicle at a Glance

DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG INSTRUMENT PANEL AUDIO SYSTEM

Your Vehicle at a Glance

PARKING BRAKE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P. 219)

Your Vehicle at a Glance

PADDLE SHIFTER HORNꭧ1 INSTRUMENT PANEL PADDLE SHIFTER WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Seat Belts ● Help keep you from being thrown

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs

Protecting Adults and Teens

4. Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

5. Fasten and Position the Seat

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of a 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Your airbag system includes:

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

● Do not spill any liquids on or

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Airbags